specification

Petroleum Development Oman LLC

Revision:3.0 Effective: Dec. 2016

Specification for Design of 132/220 kV Overhead Power Lines on Steel Towers Printed 09/09/17

The controlled version of this CMF Document resides online in Livelink®. Printed copies are UNCONTROLLED.

Petroleum Development Oman L.L.C.

SP-1114B

Specification for Design of 132/220 kV Overhead Power Lines on Steel Towers

Document ID SP-1114B

Document Type Specification

Security Restricted

Discipline Electrical

Owner UIE (UEE) – CFDH-Electrical

Issue Date Dec-16

Keywords: This document is the property of Petroleum Development Oman, LLC. Neither the whole nor any part of this document may be disclosed to others or reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form by any means (electronic, mechanical, reprographic recording or otherwise) without prior written consent of the owner.





This page was intentionally left blank





ii Document Authorisation

Authorised For Issue

User Note:

The requirements of this document are mandatory. Non-compliance shall only be authorised by the Document Owner or his Delegate through STEP-OUT approval.

A controlled copy of the current version of this document is on PDO's EDMS. Before making reference to this document, it is the user's responsibility to ensure that any hard copy, or electronic copy, is current. For assistance, contact the Document Custodian or the Document Controller. Users are encouraged to participate in the ongoing improvement of this document by providing constructive feedback.

mailto:[email protected]?subject=Ref:%20SP-1219,%20Well%20Engineering%20H2S%20Specification

mailto:[email protected]?subject=Ref:%20SP-1219,%20Well%20Engineering%20H2S%20Specification





iii Revision History

The following is a brief summary of the 4 most recent revisions to this document. Details of all revisions prior to these are held on file by the issuing department.

Version No. Date Author Scope / Remarks

Version 0 June 04 Said Al Shuely TTE/22 Original issued

Version 1 Feb 05 Said Al Shuely TTE/22 Road Crossing Towers for Wooden Pole Lines Added

Version 2.0 May 08 Said Al Shuley, UIE/6 Generally updated.

Version 3.0 Dec.16 UIE44, Noora Naamani Format changed and minor corrections made

iv Related Business Processes

Code Business Process (EPBM 4.0)

v Related Corporate Management Frame Work (CMF) Documents

The related CMF Documents can be retrieved from the Corporate Business Control Documentation Register CMF.

Code Corporate Management Frame Work (CMF) Document

CP-117 Project Engineering Code of Practice

http://sww4.pdo.shell.om/CMFportal/ListBP.aspx





Contents

1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 8

1.1. Purpose ................................................................................................................................................... 8

1.2. Scope ...................................................................................................................................................... 8

1.3. Content of the Specification ................................................................................................................... 8

1.4. Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes .................................................................................... 9 1.4.1 PDO Standards .................................................................................................................................................. 9

1.4.2 SIOP/SIEP Standards ...................................................................................................................................... 10

1.4.3 International Standards for Overhead Lines ................................................................................................... 10

1.5. Compliance with Standards ........................................................................................................................18

1.6. Order of Precedence ....................................................................................................................................18

1.7. Environmental and General Parameters .....................................................................................................18

1.8. Type of Supports .........................................................................................................................................18

1.9. Conductor Spacing and Clearance ..............................................................................................................19

1.10. Clearance to Ground and other Features ....................................................................................................19 1.10.1 Clearance from Airstrips and Helicopter Landing Pads .................................................................................. 19

1.10.2 Clearance from Parallel Pipelines ................................................................................................................... 19

1.10.3 Reactance ........................................................................................................................................................ 21

1.10.4 Clearance between the Line Conductor and the FO Cable .............................................................................. 22

1.11. Line Routing ............................................................................................................................................... 22

1.12. Access Roads .............................................................................................................................................. 22

1.13. Road Crossing Arrangement for Wooden Pole Lines ............................................................................... 23

1.14. Deliverables by Contractor ........................................................................................................................ 23

1.15. Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................................... 24

1.16. Specifications Drawings ............................................................................................................................. 24

2. Lattice Steel Towers ....................................................................................................................... 24

2.1. Classes and Designation of Tower Types ...................................................................................................24

2.2. Standard Height Towers; Extensions ..........................................................................................................25

2.3. Span Criteria ................................................................................................................................................25

2.4. Conductors and Shieldwire/OPGW Sags and Tensions ............................................................................25

2.5. Conductor and Shieldwire Spacing and Clearances ...................................................................................26

2.6. Tower Design ..............................................................................................................................................26 2.6.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 26

2.6.2 Attachments to Towers ................................................................................................................................... 27

2.6.3 Stub Angles .................................................................................................................................................... 27

2.6.4 Loading Criteria .............................................................................................................................................. 27

2.6.5 Factor of Safety .............................................................................................................................................. 31

2.6.6 Steel; Allowable Ultimate Unit Stresses ......................................................................................................... 31

2.6.7 Bolts and Nuts; Bolted Joints .......................................................................................................................... 31

2.6.8 Tower Design Documentation ........................................................................................................................ 33

2.6.9 Tower Accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 33

2.6.10 Support Earthing. ............................................................................................................................................ 33

2.7. Manufacturing .............................................................................................................................................28 2.7.1 Workmanship ................................................................................................................................................. 28

2.7.2 Galvanising ..................................................................................................................................................... 29

2.7.3 Test Requirements .......................................................................................................................................... 30





3. Foundations ..................................................................................................................................... 32

3.1. General .........................................................................................................................................................32

3.2. Soil Investigation .........................................................................................................................................32 3.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 32

3.2.2 Depth of soil investigation. ............................................................................................................................. 32

3.2.3 Soil investigation reports ................................................................................................................................ 33

3.3. Foundation Design ...................................................................................................................................... 33 3.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 33

3.3.2 Design Requirements ...................................................................................................................................... 34

3.3.3 Foundation selection ....................................................................................................................................... 36

3.3.4 Loads on foundations ...................................................................................................................................... 37

3.3.5 Stability analysis ............................................................................................................................................. 37

3.4. Foundation Design Data ............................................................................................................................. 38 3.4.1 Safety Factors ................................................................................................................................................. 38

3.4.2 Soil characteristics to be considered for foundation design ............................................................................ 39

3.5. Installation tolerances ................................................................................................................................. 39

3.6. Foundation Tests ......................................................................................................................................... 39 3.6.1 Concrete Block Foundations ........................................................................................................................... 39

3.6.2 Anchor Foundation - Tests .............................................................................................................................. 40

3.6.3 Piled Foundation ............................................................................................................................................. 40

3.6.4 Integrity Testing .............................................................................................................................................. 40

3.6.5 Earth Resistance .............................................................................................................................................. 40

3.7. Tower Site Protection and Stabilization .................................................................................................... 40

4. Overhead Line Components .......................................................................................................... 42

4.1. Line Conductors & the Shieldwire ............................................................................................................. 42 4.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 42

4.1.2 System Loading Conditions ............................................................................................................................ 42

4.1.3 Creep Prediction ............................................................................................................................................. 42

4.1.4 Materials ......................................................................................................................................................... 42

4.1.5 Workmanship .................................................................................................................................................. 42


4.2. Optical Fibre Ground Wire (OPGW) and Accessories ............................................................................. 43 4.2.1 Groundwire Requirements .............................................................................................................................. 43

4.2.2 Optical Fibres .................................................................................................................................................. 44

4.2.3 Accessories for Optical Fibre Groundwire ...................................................................................................... 44


4.2.5 Experience ...................................................................................................................................................... 45

4.3. Insulators .................................................................................................................................................... 46 4.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 46

4.3.2 Design ............................................................................................................................................................. 46


4.3.4 Identification and Marking .............................................................................................................................. 47

4.4. Insulator Fittings, Conductor Fittings, Vibration and Spacer Dampers ................................................... 48 4.4.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 48

4.4.2 Type and Uses ................................................................................................................................................. 48

4.4.3 Experience ...................................................................................................................................................... 48

4.4.4 Design ............................................................................................................................................................. 48


4.5. Tests on Complete Insulator Sets ............................................................................................................... 50

4.6. Aircraft Warning Systems .......................................................................................................................... 50





4.7. All Dielectric Short Span (ADSS) Fibre Optic Cable (for Wooden Pole Lines) ......................................... 51

Appendix G3 Minimum Factors of Safety ....................................................................................................... 1

Appendix G4 Electrical Clearances and Spacings ........................................................................................... 1

Appendix T1 Classes of Towers and Designation of Tower Types ................................................................ 3

Appendix T2 Conceptual Tower Drawings .................................................................................................... 54

Appendix T3 Span Criteria .............................................................................................................................. 1

Appendix T4 Sample of Tower Ultimate Loading Computation ..................................................................... 5

Appendix T5 Particulars of Support Design Data ........................................................................................... 1

Appendix T6 Particulars of Supports and Foundations .................................................................................. 13

Appendix T7 System Loading Conditions ....................................................................................................... 7

Appendix T8 Tower Accessories ..................................................................................................................... 1

Appendix E1 Standard Earthing ...................................................................................................................... 1

Appendix E2 Additional Earthing ................................................................................................................... 1

Appendix E3 Special Earthing ......................................................................................................................... 1

Appendix E4 Connection between Terminal Tower and Substation Earthing System .................................... 1

Appendix F1 Conceptual Foundations Drawings ........................................................................................... 16

Appendix F2 Assumed Soil Characteristics for Foundation Design ............................................................... 1

Appendix C1 Types of Line Conductors and Shieldwire ................................................................................ 1

Appendix O1 Composite Groundwire Particulars ............................................................................................ 2

Appendix O2 Particulars of the Optical Fibres ................................................................................................ 2

Appendix O3 Accessories for Composite Groundwire .................................................................................... 1

Appendix O4 OPGW Fittings .......................................................................................................................... 4

Appendix I1 Design Characteristics of Silicone Rubber Insulators (132 & 220 kV) ..................................... 1

Appendix I2 Classes of Silicone Rubber Insulator Units ............................................................................... 1

Appendix I3 Insulator Test Requirements ...................................................................................................... 1

Appendix I4 Insulator Sets for 132 kV Single AAAC ELM per Phase. ......................................................... 6

Appendix I5 Insulator Sets for 132 kV Twin AAAC ELM per Phase ........................................................... 6

Appendix I6 Insulator Sets for 132 kV Single AAAC YEW per Phase ......................................................... 6

Appendix I7 Insulator Sets for 132 kV Twin AAAC YEW per Phase ........................................................... 6

Appendix I8 Insulator Sets for 220 kV Single AAAC YEW per Phase ......................................................... 6

Appendix I9 Insulator Sets for 220 kV Twin AAAC YEW per Phase ........................................................... 6

Appendix H1 Conductor Joints & Clamps – Type & Uses .............................................................................. 1

Appendix H2 Vibration Dampers - Type & Uses ............................................................................................ 1

Appendix H3 Spacers and Spacer Dampers - Type & Uses ............................................................................ 1

Appendix H4 Tests on Vibration Dampers ...................................................................................................... 1

Appendix H5 Tests on Spacers / Spacer Dampers ........................................................................................... 1

Appendix H6 Type and Sample Test Requirements for Insulator Fittings;

Conductor and Shieldwire Fittings ............................................................................................ 1

Appendix S1 Insulator Sets Types & Uses, Electrical & Mechanical Characteristics .................................... 6

Appendix W1 Road Crossing Arrangement for 132kV Lines on Wooden Poles,

Single & Twin ELM AAAC per Phase .................................................................................... 11

NOTE TO THE APPENDICES: It shall be understood that all data in the Appendices either required or filled in by the Contractor shall be deemed as

Minimum Guaranteed Technical Particulars.





1. Introduction

1.1. PURPOSE

The design of 132 kV and 220 kV Overhead Lines on Lattice Steel Towers in PDO's System shall be

generally governed by, but not limited to, the provisions specified herein, and shall be undertaken using the

highest standards of professional engineering and in a safe manner.

These Specifications (SP) outline the minimum requirements for the design of 132 kV and 220 kV

overhead lines with Optical Fibre Ground Wire and/or classical shieldwire.

These Specifications are also extended for the design of 132kV Lattice Steel Towers for Road Crossing

used for Wooden Pole Lines when the adjacent structures to crossing towers are either of Lattice Steel type

or Wood type; crossing towers shall be always Steel Towers.

This standard design shall be applicable to all new lines where FO cable installation is likely in the future.

At the Front End Design (FED) stage the Design Consultant shall establish the requirement for stringing FO

cable.

For installation of Overhead Lines and other associated electrical equipment, relevant SPs are listed herein

and shall be referred to. This Specification shall be utilised in conjunction with one or more of the

referenced SP's and International Standards to complete PDO's requirements for installation of overhead

line facilities.

1.2. SCOPE

The purpose of these standard design specifications is to present the complete standard design criteria and

calculations for 132kV and 220kV transmission lines with Fibre Optic Cable on PDO's Electrical System.

This technical information herein is essentially for Transmission Line Design Engineers. However, the

application and use of this specification extends to all who are responsible for planning, design,

construction, inspection, operation and maintenance of transmission systems.

The information provided herein will cover the majority of the design problems encountered by the

Transmission Line Design Engineer. However, it is not feasible to cover all contingencies. The design

engineer must have the knowledge, professional ability, skills and desire to recognise and deal with special

applications/conditions.

Contractor shall have the desire, knowledge, technical ability and experience to propose design changes for

varying conditions. Contractor shall be responsible for proposing design modifications during line design

for hilly terrain, line route not straight, sand dunes and poor soil conditions or any other change from the

stated basic design conditions.

The PDO 132 kV and 220kV Transmission System is alternating current, 50Hz, three phase, with a solidly

grounded neutral at Y-connected transformers.

1.3. CONTENT OF THE SPECIFICATION

This specification includes design criteria for 132kV and 220kV Overhead Lines on steel lattice towers as

well as specifications for 132kV and 220kV Overhead Lines towers, foundations and line materials; the

Specifications apply also for the design of Road Crossings on Lattice Steel Towers where the adjacent

structures to crossing towers are either Wooden Poles or Lattice Steel Towers; crossing towers shall be





always steel towers.

The standard Overhead line structures, foundations and other accessories are presented in the drawings

attached to this document.

Contractor shall be required to make structure design calculations for steel towers. It is the Contractor's

responsibility to call errors and omissions and conflict between drawings to the attention of PDO for

resolution.

Contractor shall be required to make sag and tension calculations for conductor installations within the

design parameters listed in this specification when the actual ruling spans differ from those shown.

Contractor shall utilise an industry recognised and accepted Sag and Tension Calculation Program such as

"SAG 10" or "PLS-CADD" or “Sag Tension CADtenary” or an approved equivalent.

Contractor shall be required to provide complete Plan and Profile Drawings showing structure locations,

conductor sag curves and ground clearance curves within the design parameters specified herein.

The Contractor shall remain responsible for the overall design and construction of the complete

transmission line.

For erection of overhead lines, relevant SPs are listed herein and shall be referred to. The specification shall

be applied in conjunction with the referred SPs or international Standards to complete PDO’s requirements

for erection of Overhead Lines.

1.4. APPLICABLE STANDARDS, SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES

All listed documents applied for design, supply, installation and commissioning shall be latest issue.

1.4.1 PDO Standards

HSESM Health Safety and Environmental Protection Standards Manual

ERD-00-06 Preparation & Content of Engineering Drawings

ERD-00-14 Project drawing Procedures.

ERD-11-02 Engineering Guideline Site Selection and Soil Investigation Manual

ERD-19-07 Civil & Building Guide to Concrete

SP-1011 Specification for Installation of Overhead Transmission Lines.

SR-1099 Specification for Electrical Installation Practice.

SP-1103 Specification for Electrical Engineering Guidelines (Amendment/supplement

to DEP 33.64.10.10.)

SP-1104 Electrical Safety Rules.

SP-1105 Electrical Standard Drawings.

SP-1106 Specification for Coding & Identification of Overhead Lines Systems.

SP-1107 Electrical Protection Systems.

SP-1108 Electrical safety Operating Procedures.

SP-1109 Specification for Earthing and Bonding.

SP-1111 Specification for Temporary Electrical Supplies for Construction &





Maintenance Work.

SP-1127 Layout and spacing of Plant Equipment and Facilities.

SP-1131 Handover & As-Built Documentation.

SP-1171 Specification for Quality Assurance of Design, Construction and Engineering

Works

1.4.2 SIOP/SIEP Standards

DEP 33.64.10.10-Gen Electrical Engineering Guidelines.

DEP 34.11.00.11-Gen Site Preparation and Earthworks.

DEP 63.10.08.11-Gen Field Inspection of Electrical Installation and Equipment.

DEP 34.11.00.10-Gen Site Investigation

1.4.3 International Standards for Overhead Lines

1. Design of Overhead Lines

ANSI C2 - 2002 National Electrical Safety Code.

ASCE No. 74 Guidelines for Electrical Transmission Line Structural Loading

DIN VDE 0210 Planning and Design of OHTL with Rated Voltage above 1 kV

EN 50341 Overhead Electrical Lines Exceeding AC 45kV

IEEE:524:1992 Guide to Installation of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors.

ICAO International Standards and Recommended Practices

AERODROMES Annex 14 to the Convention of International Civil

Aviation, Volume 1, Aerodrome Design and Operations, Chapter 6, Visual

Aids for Denoting Obstacles.

+Aerodrome design manual paragraph 14.7, Obstacle lighting high-tension

overhead wires

Air Navigation Services-Aircraft Operation (PANSOPS doc.8168)

2. Steel Lattice Towers for Overhead Lines

ASCE 10-97 Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures

ASCE Manual No. 52 Design of lattice steel towers - Code of practice for strength assessment of

members of lattice towers and masts

ASTM A 36 Standard Specifications for Structural Steel.

ASTM A 394 Standard Specification for zinc coated steel transmission tower bolts.

ASTM A 572 High Strength Structural Steel, Grade 50

ASTM A588/588M-94 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with

50ksi (345Mpa) Minimum Yield Point.





BS 4:Part 1 Structural Steel Sections. Specification for Hot-Rolled Sections

BS 729:1971(1986) Specification for Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles.

BS 3436 Specification for ingot zinc

BS 3643:Part 2 ISO Metric Screw Threads

BS 4102 Barbed Wire

BS 4190 : 2001 ISO Metric Black Hexagon Bolts, Screws and Nuts-Specification

BS 4360 Specification for Weldable Structural Steel

BS 4464 Specification for Spring Washers for general engineering and automobile

purposes-Metric Series





BS 4848:Part 4 Specification for Hot – Rolled Structural Steel Section. Equal and unequal

angles

BS 4872:Part 1:1982 Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure

approval is not required – Fusion welding of steel

BS 5135:1984 Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels

BS 5493:1977 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures against

corrosion

BS 5950-1:2000 Structural Use of Steelwork in Building.

BS 7361-6 Coatings on Metal Fasteners - PART 6: Specification for Hot Dipped

Galvanized Coatings

BS DD133 Code of Practice for Strength Assessment of Members of Lattice Towers

and Masts

BS EN 1990:2002 Eurocode – Basis of structural design

BS EN 10025:1990 Specification for hot-rolled products of non-alloy structural steels and their

technical delivery conditions

BS EN 10029:1991 Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot-rolled

steel plates 3 mm thick or above.

BS EN 10056-2 Specification for structural steel equal and unequal leg angle. Tolerances on

shape and dimensions

BS EN 10113 Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels

BS EN 10155:1993 Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance. Technical

delivery conditions

BS EN 10163 Specification for Delivery Requirements for Surface Conditions of Hot-

Rolled Steel Plate, Wide Flats and Sections

BS-EN-ISO-1461 Specification for Hot Dip Galvanising of Structural Steel.

EN 10025 Steels for General Structural Purpose (Quality Standard)

IEC 60826 Loading and strength of overhead transmission lines

IEC 60652/2002 Loading Test on Overhead Line Towers

ISO 1459:1973 Metallic coatings – Protection against corrosion by hot-dip galvanizing –

Guiding principles

3. Foundations

BS 8004:1986 Code of practice for foundations

BS 8081 Ground anchorage

BS 8110-P1-1997 Code of practice for design and construction

DIN 1045 Concrete, reinforced and prestressed concrete structures

DIN 4014 Bored piles, construction procedure, design and bearing behavior

IEC 1277 Full scale test on foundations





IEC 61773/1996 Overhead lines - Testing of foundations for structures





4. Phase Conductors & ACS Shieldwire

ASTM A 123-89a Standard Specifications for Zinc (Hot- Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products.

ASTM 399-82 Concentric lay stranded aluminium alloy 6201-T81

ASTM 399-90 Standard specification for aluminium alloy 6201-T81 wire for electrical

purposes

ASTM B415:1992 Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Aluminum-Clad Steel Wire

ASTM B416:1988 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Clad-Steel

Conductors

BS 443:1982(1990) Specification for testing zinc coatings on steel wire and for quality

requirements

BS 1490:1988 Specification for aluminium and aluminium alloy ingots and castings for

general engineering purposes

BS 3242 Specification for Aluminium Alloy stranded Conductor for Overhead Power

Transmission.

BS EN 50182:2001 Conductors for overhead lines - Round wire concentric lay stranded

conductors.

CIGRE - Electra No. 75 Permanent Elongation of Conductors - Predictor Equation and Evaluation

Methods

DIN 46391 Delivery Drums for Conductors

IEC 60104 Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for OHTL

IEC 60888 Zinc-coated steel wires for stranded conductors

IEC 61089:1997 Amdt.1 1997 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded

conductors

IEC 61089:1991 Round wire Concentric Lay Overhead Electrical Stranded Conductors.

IEC 61232:1993 Aluminum Clad-Steel Wire for Electrical Purposes

IEEE 738 IEEE Standard for the calculation of Current Temperature Relationship of

Bare Overhead Conductors.

5. Optical Fibre Ground Wire (OPGW)

BS EN 187000 Generic specification for optical fibre cables

BS EN 188000 Generic specification for optical fibre cables

EIA 492A Generic Specification for Optical Waveguide Fibers

EIA 472A Sectional Specification for Fiber Optic Communication Cables for Outside

Aerial Use

EIA/TIA-455 Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers,

Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices and other Fiber Optic

Components





IEC 60304 Colour coding of fibers

IEC 60793 Optical Fibers

IEC 60794 Optical Fiber Cables. Generic and production specifications





IEEE 1138 Standard Construction of Composite Fiber Optic Overhead Ground Wire

(OPGW) for use on Electric Utility Power Lines

IEEE:P1138 Specification for optical fibre ground wire (OPGW)

ITU-T G.650 Definition and test methods for the relative parameters of single mode fibers

ITU-T G.652 Characteristics of a Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable

ITU-T G.655 Characteristics of Non-Zero Dispersion-Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers

6. Insulator Strings & Conductor Fittings

ANSI C29.11 Composite Suspension Insulators for Overhead Transmission Lines - Tests

ASTM 153/153M-95 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot- Dip Galvanized) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.

ASTM A 563 Nuts for Bolted Connections

BS 3100:1991 Specification for steel castings for general engineering purposes

BS 3288 Part 1:1997 Insulator and conductor fittings for Overhead Power Lines. Performance and

general requirements

BS 3288 Part 2:1990 Specification for a range of fittings.

BS 3288 Part 3:1989 Dimensions of ball and socket couplings of string insulator units.

BS 3288 Part 4:1989 Locking devices for ball and socking couplings of string insulator units:

dimensions and tests.

BS 60383-2:1995 Insulator strings & insulator sets for a.c. systems. Definitions, test method

and acceptance criteria

CISPR 18-2:1986: Part 2 Radio interference characteristics of overhead power lines and high-voltage

equipment. Methods of measurement and procedure for determining limits.

DIN/VDE 0212 Fittings for overhead lines and switchgear, Part 50 to 53

DIN 48006 Insulators of overhead lines: long rod insulators

DIN 48062-2 Overhead Lines, clevis caps for insulators

DIN 48069-1 Double eyes; without protective fitting attachment; for overhead power lines

DIN 48069-2 Double eyes; with protective fitting attachment; for overhead power lines

DIN 48070-1 Triangular yokes for overhead power lines

DIN 48073 Clevis-tongue couplings – Safety devices

DIN 48074 Eyes and clevises; connecting dimensions

DIN 48075 Parallel groove clamps for aluminium stranded conductors and for

aluminium conductors steel-reinforced for overhead power lines

DIN 48078-1 Clevis straps for overhead lines; for coupling to connecting bolts on the

strap side

DIN 48215 Clamps and Connectors for Overhead Power Lines

DIN 48334 Turnbuckles for overhead power lines





IEC 60060-1 High voltage test techniques

IEC 60120 Dimension of Ball and Socket couplings of String Insulator Units.

IEC 60383 Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage above 1000 V

IEC 60433:1998 Characteristics of String Insulator Units of the Long Rod type.

IEC 60437:1997 Radio interference test on high voltage insulators

IEC 60471:1977 Dimensions of clevis and tongue coupling of string insulator units

IEC 60507:1991 Artificial pollution tests on high-voltage insulators to be used on a.c.

systems

IEC 60587:1984 Test method for evaluating resistance to tracking and erosion of electrical

insulating materials under severe ambient conditions

IEC 60707:1999 Method of test for the determination of the flammability of solid electrical

insulating materials when exposed to an igniting source

IEC 60815:1986 Guide for selection of Insulators in respect of Polluted Conditions.

IEC 61109:1992 Composite Insulators for a.c. Overhead Lines with a nominal voltage greater

than 1000 V – Definitions, test methods and acceptable tests. (&

Amendment 1)

IEC 61854 Requirements and Tests for Spacers

IEC 61284 Overhead lines, Requirements and tests for fittings

IEC 61466 Composite string insulator units for overhead lines with a nominal voltage

greater than 1000 V, parts 1 and 2

IEEE 4 Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing

IEEE Report PAS-85 Standardisation of conductor vibration measurements

IEEE:PAS-85:l966 Vibration intensity of conductors.

ISO 1460:1992 Metallic coatings – Hot dip galvanised coatings on ferrous materials –

Gravimetric

ISO 1461:1973 Metallic coatings – Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated ferrous

products – Requirements

7. Earthing

BS 7430 Code of Practice for Earthing.

BS EN 1654:1998 Copper and copper alloys. Strip for springs and connectors

DIN/VDE 0141 VDE-specification for earthing in installations of rated voltages above 1 kV

a.c.

DIN 48088 Earth Clamping Bolts

IEEE 1048 IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines.





1.5. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS

All requirements of this Standard shall apply except where equipment Manufacturer's standards are more

stringent, then the latter shall apply.

For any deviations from this Standard the Contractor shall obtain the written agreement of PDO prior to

execution of the related engineering work.

In all cases the Company shall determine the adequacy of design carried out and Works executed by the

Contractor in accordance with this Standard.

1.6. ORDER OF PRECEDENCE

If the Contractor has any concern about the applicable specification for a particular project, he shall bring

the concern or question to the attention of PDO for clarification or resolution. PDO’s decision shall be final

and binding.

1.7. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GENERAL PARAMETERS

The Environmental and General parameters are given in Appendix nos. G1 & G2.

1.8. TYPE OF SUPPORTS

All supports shall be latticed galvanised steel structures, self-supporting and symmetrical. Tower members

shall be steel angle sections. They will accommodate either single or double circuit, single or twin AAAC

conductor per phase and one shieldwire being of either aluminium clad steel construction or Optical Fiber

Ground Wire (OPGW) of equivalent mechanical and electrical capability.

Road Crossing Lattice Steel Supports used for Wooden Pole lines will accommodate single circuit with

phases in horizontal formation, single or twin AAAC conductor per phase and one All Dielectric Short

Span (ADSS) optical cable.

For typical type of the towers’ reference is made to Appendix T2.

The phase conductors are AAAC ELM or YEW for 132 kV lines (as appropriate) and AAAC YEW for

220kV lines.

Each family of 132 kV towers shall have four tower types (with reference to Appendix T1):

- Intermediate Support, fitted with Suspension Insulator Sets and used up to 2° line deviation;

- Small angle (0°-20°), Section and Heavy Suspension Support, fitted either with Tension Insulator Sets

or Heavy Suspension Insulator Sets;

- Large Angle Support (20°-60°) fitted with Tension Insulator Sets;

- Dead End (0°-45°) and Extra Large Angle Support (60°-90°), fitted with Tension Insulator Sets.

Each family of 220 kV towers shall have five tower types (with reference to Appendix T1):

- Intermediate Support, fitted with Suspension Insulator Sets and used up to 2° line deviation;

- Small angle (0°-10°), Section and Heavy Suspension Support, fitted either with Tension Insulator Sets

or Heavy Suspension Insulator Sets;

- Medium Angle Support (10°-30°) fitted with Tension Insulator Sets;





- Large Angle Support (30°-60°) fitted with Tension Insulator Sets;

- Dead End (0°-45°) and Extra Large Angle Support (60°-90°), fitted with Tension Insulator Sets.

Road Crossing Lattice Steel Towers for Wooden Pole lines:

- Dead End (0°) support, fitted with Tension Insulator Sets (used when one of the adjacent structures is

Wooden Pole).

1.9. CONDUCTOR SPACING AND CLEARANCE For all supports the clearances from conductors, jumper loops and all live metal to the cross arm steelwork

and tower steel shall be those indicated in Appendix G4.

1.10. CLEARANCE TO GROUND AND OTHER FEATURES The clearances between the line conductors and the ground in still air under the maximum specified

temperature and final tension shall not be less than as specified in Appendix G4. An additional clearance of

0.6m to compensate initial conductor bending down and creep shall be added to the above clearances.

The clearance under all specified conditions between any part of any fence, wall, building or other structure on

which a man may stand or against- which a ladder may be placed and the nearest line conductor shall be as per

Appendix G4.

1.10.1 Clearance from Airstrips and Helicopter Landing Pads

Clearance from airstrips and helicopter landing pads shall meet the requirements of civil aviation authorities

and their permission shall be obtained prior to commencement of work.

For any line designed to pass within a 4.6 km radius from the centre of the airstrips or helicopter landing

pads shall meet the requirements of authorities concerned. On the approach and take-off directions the

restriction extends up to 15 km from the centre of the runway.

A topographical map showing the proposed line details and construction programme shall be submitted to the

Head of PDO Air Operations well in advance to obtain permission from the Directorate of Civil

Aviation. This may require a site visit by the authorities.

The 'obstacles’ within this area are determined according to the height of the structure. The criteria for

evaluating the 'obstacle' are detailed in procedures for 'Air Navigation Services-Aircraft Operation

(PANSOPS doc.8168)'.

Further details can be found in the 'International Standards and Recommended Practice AERODROME

Annex. 14.'.

No construction within the restricted area shall commence without clearance from the authorities

concerned.

1.10.2 Clearance from Parallel Pipelines

Metal pipelines used to convey fluids can be can be considered as conductors insulated from earth. They

may for part of their length be exposed to several types of influences and especially to influences of near

HV lines. The influences can result of three types of couplings:

- Capacitive

- Inductive





- Conductive

Under fault conditions in the most severe cases and if no protective measures taken voltages on influenced

pipelines can reach magnitude between several hundred volts and a few kilovolts.

In normal operation, influences are normally much lower, but nevertheless safety problems can be created.

Capacitive coupling

Only aerial pipelines situated in the proximity of aerial high voltage lines are subjected to the capacitive

influence of the conductors.

Power frequency voltages appear between the pipelines and earth when the pipeline is insulated from the

earth, their magnitudes depend mainly on the voltage level of the line, on the distance between power line and

pipeline, and on the line operating conditions (normal operations or faults).

Metallic pipelines are most often buried and therefore protected from any capacitive coupling effects.

Inductive coupling

Parallel running of high voltage overhead lines induce voltages in pipelines in steady state and fault

conditions, which, if not restricted, can have the following effects:

- Danger to personnel coming in contact with the pipelines (touch and step voltages).

- Damages to the pipeline coating.

- Cathodic Protection may become inoperative.

The Induced voltages depend on the following factors:

a) Separation distance

b) Line current

c) Transmission Voltage level

d) Pipe coating resistance

e) Soil resistivity

Under normal operating conditions the maximum induced voltage on the pipeline shall be limited to 50

Volts to ensure personnel safety. Studies show that pipeline - induced potential in PDO systems is

approximately 43 V, which is well within limits.

Under fault condition the induced voltage is much higher, and it varies with the line current contribution

from both ends of the 132 & 220 kV line as well as the parallel length of run. To achieve a safe touch

voltage of 542 V as per ANSI / IEEE, the separation which needs to be maintained depends on the parallel run

and is given in the table below. Earth fault currents of 2000 A and fault clearance time of 0.3 sec have been

considered in the study.

Parallel Run Minimum separation to be maintained between 132 kV & 220 kV

Overhead Line and Pipe

Up to 4.5 km 500 metres

4.5 km to 6.5 km 1 km

6.5 km to 10 km 1.75 km





For parallel runs beyond 10 km and/or higher fault currents, specific case studies need to be conducted to

determine the separation required. If the induced voltage / time limitations can not be met, additional safe

working practices and precautionary measures shall be applied to protect personnel when working on

exposed conductive parts of the pipeline and associated components.

Precautionary measures shall include but not necessarily be limited to low resistance pipe coating,

grounding mat near the pipelines, and suitable layer of crushed rock / limestone on the surface near the

pipes for persons to stand and work.

In case the above separation between the power line and pipeline cannot be observed then the pipeline

department shall make his own study and implement the required pipeline protection the installation to

comply with safety regulations, i.e. the pipeline cathodic protection shall be designed for a higher current.

Conductive coupling

Fault current flowing through the earthing electrode of a tower produce a potential rise of the electrode and of

the neighbouring soil with regard to remote earth. Pipelines will be influenced if they are connected to the

ground electrode of the HV system or if they enter into the “zone of influence” of the electrical

installation; the insulating coating is then subject to the potential difference that exists between the local

earth and the pipe potential and can be damaged.

If a pipeline is not influenced by capacitive or inductive coupling, its normal potential can be assumed to

remain very close to the reference potential of remote earth. Therefore, any earth potential rise at the

pipeline location due to a fault or lightning stroke on the tower is applied directly to the insulating coating of

pipeline and puncturing of the pipeline coating can occur. Melting of the pipeline steel may even occur only

when the pipeline is very close to a tower earth electrode. A fraction of earth potential rise is than applied

to the metallic pipeline and can be transferred by the pipeline to a remote pipeline access point or

cathodic protection system. It may create touch and step voltage, which may be applied, to workers

touching the pipeline at access points or standing nearby such point.

In the case of proximity between a pipeline and transmission line tower, mitigation of conductive coupling

effects may be achieved by reducing the earth potential rise at pipeline location, increasing the pipeline

coating dielectric withstand, etc. In any case for crossing the OHL with pipeline the following is

recommended:

- minimum distance of 50 m have to be provided between line tower and pipeline

- recommended crossing angle between HV line and pipeline have to be more than 45°.

1.10.3 Reactance

Calculated positive sequence reactance is based on standard intermediate structure employing ELM and

YEW conductor.

Single ELM 132 kV Lines 0.453 Ω/km/circuit

Twin ELM 132 kV Lines 0.308 Ω/km/circuit

Single YEW

132 kV Lines 220 kV Lines

0.404 Ω/km/circuit 0.433 Ω/km/circuit





Twin YEW


0.287 Ω/km/circuit 0.312 Ω/km/circuit

1.10.4 Clearance between the Line Conductor and the FO Cable

A minimum clear separation of 1.2m shall be maintained between the 132kV line conductors and the FO

Cable along the entire span under all loading conditions as per the recommendations of National Electrical

Safety Code C2-2002 published by The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

1.11. LINE ROUTING The route and initial survey should be provided by PDO. The route of an overhead line shall be determined

and the lengths and sections shall be chosen to avoid/minimise the requirement for in-line joints. The

maximum section length shall be 5000 metres.

Section (Tension) Structures at the ends of each section length shall be fully supported to enable structure to

withstand forces associated with broken conductor conditions on either side of a structure.

Overhead lines, as far as possible shall be constructed in a straight line between section structures. Small

deviations up to 2° shall be resolved with intermediate towers.

1.12. ACCESS ROADS Access roads of at least 4 m width from approved backfill material shall be made along the line for

construction purposes. At the end of construction period and prior to handing to over to PDO these roads

shall be repaired, resurfaced and graded to the satisfaction of PDO, so that the Company can use these roads for

regular line maintenance.





1.13. ROAD CROSSING ARRANGEMENT FOR WOODEN POLE LINES

The steel towers road crossing arrangements for 132kV lines on wooden poles are given in Appendix W1. The

crossing shall be protected on each side by crossing guards. Crossing guards shall comply with the

standard drawings STD 4 1411 001 Rev.D and STD 4 1411 002 Rev.D (Specification SP 1114A).

The decision regarding the applicable solution (single or double circuit for crossing span) will be taken by

PDO based on the cost effectiveness and future development of the network.

1.14. DELIVERABLES BY CONTRACTOR The following Engineering Documents shall be submitted for Approval:

1. Numbering system of documentation

2. Drawing Schedule/Drawing List

3. Line route drawings/maps of Overhead Transmission Line

4. Longitudinal profile drawings of Overhead Transmission Line

5. Spotting of steel towers on longitudinal profiles, structure lists and sag templates.

6. Soil Investigation Report

7. Access Road drawings

8. Documentation concerning phase conductors

9. Detailed drawings of conductor fittings and accessories (including mid-span joints, repair sleeves etc.)

10. Detailed drawings of each insulator set (including all fittings)

11. Documentation concerning shieldwires and OPGW/ADSS

12. Detailed drawings of shieldwire and OPGW/ADSS fittings

13. Detailed drawings of joint boxes

14. Detailed drawings of shieldwire/OPGW/ADSS suspension set and tension sets (including all fittings)

15. Detailed drawing of aircraft warning devices

16. Detailed drawing of conductor and shieldwires/OPGW/ADSS drums

17. Performance test reports on conductors, shieldwires/OPGW/ADSS, insulators, insulator sets etc.

18. Wire Clearance Diagram and Loading Calculation for each steel tower type

19. Design calculations for each type of lattice steel tower

20. Design Calculation and Workshop drawings of stub angles of each tower type

21. Workshop drawings of each tower type

22. Tower full scale test programs and reports for each type of tower

23. Sag tension calculation for phase conductors and shieldwires/OPGW/ADSS

24. Installation criteria for vibration dampers, spacers, spacer dampers (if any)

25. Design calculation and detailed drawings for lattice steel tower foundations





26. Detailed drawings of tower site protection and stabilization

27. Detailed drawings of earthing systems

28. Detailed drawings of identification plates, danger plates, number and phase plates

29. Sag Tension Calculation

30. Detailed drawings of Anti-climbing devices

31. Operation manuals and maintenance books.

32. All As Built documents.

Contractor shall submit deliverables as specified throughout this document. The Contractor shall allow in his

programme 21 days for revision and approval of the submitted documents.

1.15. QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor shall implement a Quality assurance System in accordance with PDO-SP-1171:

Specification for Quality Assurance of Design, Construction and Engineering Works.

1.16. SPECIFICATIONS DRAWINGS The drawings referred in the Specifications are for guideline. The Contractor shall develop specific line,

tower/structure, foundations, insulator sets, OPGW sets and accessories meeting the requirements of the

Contract Specifications and site conditions for the Construction.

2. Lattice Steel Towers This specification covers 132 kV and 220 kV towers single and double circuit equipped with single or twin

ELM or YEW AAAC for 132 kV and single or twin YEW AAAC for 220kV. The shieldwire will be 7/3.26

ACS or OPGW with equivalent electrical and mechanical capabilities.

This specification is providing also design criteria for lattice steel towers for Road Crossing on 132kV lines on

wooden poles.

This specification is providing the necessary instructions for detailed design of standard towers families or for

typical tower designs for specific overhead line projects.

Only installation instructions resulted from design requirements are presented in this specification, but full

details on this subject shall be provided in the Installation Specifications for 132kV and 220kV Overhead

Power Lines.

2.1. CLASSES AND DESIGNATION OF TOWER TYPES Single circuit towers shall be of isosceles triangle phase arrangement with two phases on one tower side and the

third on the other tower side. A single shieldwire will provide a 30°-shade angle.

Double circuit towers shall be of vertical phase formation with a single shieldwire that provides a shade

angle of 30°.

Road crossing lattice steel towers for wooden pole lines shall be of horizontal phase formation with or

without All Dielectric Short Span (ADSS) Optical Fibre Cable installed below the phase conductor. In

addition, Dead End Towers with conductor in isosceles triangle formation (designed for single circuit lines) or





double circuit towers, could be used as road crossings towers for wooden pole lines.

If the structures adjacent to the road crossing are lattice steel towers, then the road crossing towers shall be

any tower from the tension steel structures as to match the actual line angle.

The classes of towers and their designation are given in Appendix T1. For tower geometry reference is made to

Appendix T2.

2.2. STANDARD HEIGHT TOWERS; EXTENSIONS Standard Height Towers are designated to support the conductors (at maximum temperature) at the defined

clearance above normal ground under the specified ultimate loadings assuming such towers are at the same

ground level and at the standard (basic) span.

Each tower type shall be designed to allow for variation in height. Towers with any combination of

extension to the basic height tower shall be capable of carrying all specified ultimate loadings.

Each tower shall be provided with Body Extension of +3m, +6m and +9m and each individual leg shall be

designated to be provided with –2m, -1m, ±0m, +1m, +2m, +3m extension applicable to the basic body

height and 3m, 6m & 9m extensions.

Single Circuit Road Crossing lattice steel towers with conductors in horizontal formation for wooden pole

lines shall be designed for basic span of 200m and a standard clearance to roads with level surface (16.6m – see

Appendix G4). An extension of 3m to standard height shall be provided to accommodate constraints in

crossings in addition to reducing the crossing span.

2.3. SPAN CRITERIA The span length specified in Appendix T3 shall be deemed to be horizontal distance between centre lines of

adjacent towers. When a span in excess of the specified maximum span is unavoidable, approval on the

application should be obtained from PDO.

The term wind span means half the sum of adjacent horizontal span lengths supported on any one tower.

The term weight span means the equivalent length of the weight of conductor supported at any one tower at

minimum temperature in still air. The total weight supported by any intermediate tower suspension

insulator set shall not be less than 30% of the total weight of the corresponding phase conductors in the two

adjacent spans. This condition shall apply at the assumed minimum temperature without wind.

All towers when used with corresponding maximum angles of deviation, the sum of the two adjacent spans

shall not exceed the twice the wind span stated in Appendix T3 provided that no single span length exceed the

maximum span.

Section towers may be used at straight line positions where necessary for uplift conditions or for sectioning in

a straight line route.

Angle towers shall be suitable for maximum/minimum weight spans combined with maximum wind and

full range of line deviation for which the angle tower are designed.

2.4. CONDUCTORS AND SHIELDWIRE/OPGW SAGS AND TENSIONS The conductors and shieldwire/OPGW shall be strung with such sags that at every day temperature (35°C) in

still air the final sag will provide a minimum factor on the ultimate tensile strength of 5.0; also, at





minimum temperature (+5°C) and with a wind of 971N/m² on the whole projected area of the conductors,

shieldwires and OPGW a minimum factor of safety of 2.5 shall be observed. Shieldwire/OPGW sag at

Every Day Temperature will represent 90% of the corresponding conductor sag.

The specified wind loadings shall be increased by the specified wind force coefficients.

The term “final tension” shall mean the tension existing in a line conductor, for any given condition of

loading, after sufficient period in service to allow for bending down stretch and creep to take place. For

purpose of calculating creep allowances this should be taken as ten years from erection.

“PLS-CADD” or “Sag Tension CADtenary” or “SAG10” or other approved software shall be used for OHL

profile drawings, towers spotting and sag tension calculation.

2.5. CONDUCTOR AND SHIELDWIRE SPACING AND CLEARANCES For all towers the clearances from conductors, arcing horns/rings, jumper loops and all live metal to tower

steelwork shall not be less than those specified in Appendix G4 under still air conditions and at assumed

maximum swing of jumpers and suspension insulator strings.

For all angle/section/heavy suspension towers these clearances shall be maintained when heavy suspension

insulator sets are used.

For angle and terminal towers at the maximum angle of line deviation the minimum horizontal separation

between circuits shall not be less than that of intermediate tower.

For terminal towers, additional phase conductor attachment points shall be provided for specified entry

angles or to enable downlead span connections to be made in any desired phase sequence; additional

crossarms for downleads shall be provided when necessary.

Jumper suspension insulators may be used, if required, for angles greater than 60° (D9 towers). The maximum

angle of shade protection shall be of 30° to vertical at any point in the span.

For all road crossing towers used for wooden pole lines, in case of spans over 250m, the clearance between

phase conductor and ADSS Optical Cable shall be checked for all computation conditions.

2.6. TOWER DESIGN

2.6.1 General

Towers shall have the general arrangement and geometry shown in the conceptual drawings included in

these standard specifications and shall resist the specified loadings.

Clearances between live parts and steelwork, and between the phase conductors and ground shall be as

specified on conceptual drawings (Appendix T2).

All tower designs shall be such as to facilitate inspection, painting, maintenance, repairs, and operation with the

continuity of supply being the prime consideration.

Main leg members of lattice steel towers shall be formed of maximum single length appropriate to the body or

leg extensions and shall not, if appropriate incorporate additional spliced sections.

A fully triangulated system of bracings shall preferably be adapted. If full triangulation is not adapted the

overall stability and secondary-bending stresses must be considered in the design.

Crossarms shall be so arranged that they can be dismantled from the tower without disturbing any members

forming part of the tower body.





2.6.2 Attachments to Towers

The attachments of phase conductors, shieldwires and erection/maintenance brackets shall be undertaken as

follows:

a) Intermediate Towers

- suspension insulator set and shieldwire attachments shall be of approved swivel or shackle

arrangement;

- adjacent to both sides of all suspension insulator set attachment points, additional maintenance points

shall be provided, capable of resisting the specified construction and maintenance (C&M) load;

- adjacent to the shieldwire suspension set attachment point, an additional maintenance point shall be

provided, capable of resisting the specified C&M load;

- at each tower body crossarm connection point (bottom chord level) maintenance plates/brackets shall

be provided for the attachment of rigging blocks, capable of resisting the specified C&M load;

- OPGW attachments shall be capable of accepting both suspension and tension sets; maintenance holes

shall also be provided.

b) Angle/Tension Towers

- tension insulator set and shieldwire attachments shall be of an approved swivel or shackle arrangement;

- adjacent to both sides of all tension insulator set attachment points, additional maintenance points shall

be provided, capable of resisting the C&M loadings;

- adjacent to all tension insulator set attachment points, a vertical maintenance attachment point shall be

provided, capable of resisting the C&M loads;

- adjacent to the shieldwire tension set attachment point, an additional maintenance point shall be

provided, capable of resisting the C&M loads;

- for towers for line deviation 60° and above attachment points, for pilot insulators shall be provided;

- at each tower body crossarm connection point (bottom chord level) maintenance plates/brackets shall

be provided for the attachment of riggings blocks, capable of resisting the specified C&M load;

2.6.3 Stub Angles

Only one design of stub angle for all body and leg extensions shall be permitted for each tower type.

The thickness of the stub leg members shall not be less than that of the corresponding tower leg members. The

design calculation of stub angles shall be in accordance with requirements from Chapter 9 of ASCE

Manual 52. The uplift load shall be 100% sustained by the angle shear connectors (cleats) and the minimum

distance from the upper cleat to top level of foundation concrete shall be 8 times the width of cleat angle

leg.

2.6.4 Loading Criteria

The assumed system loading criteria is based on the deterministic principles of ultimate loads derived from

working loads multiplied by their respective factors of safety, for normal (climatic), unbalanced (security)

and construction & maintenance loading conditions.

A. Normal (Climatic) Loadings

Specific maximum simultaneous working loadings shall be as follows: A1. Intermediate (Suspension) Towers





- Vertical Loadings: the weight of insulator sets and all other fittings and the actual dead weight of

specified span lengths of line conductors and shieldwire.

- Transverse Loadings: a wind pressure of 971 N/m² acting at right angle to the spans on the projected

area of conductors, insulators and shieldwire multiplied by the specified wind force coefficient and shape

factors plus the transverse component of conductor and shieldwire maximum tensions resolved for the

specified angle of line deviation (2°); in addition a wind pressure of 1600 N/m² on 1.5 times the projected area

of the members of one tower face.

A2. Angle Towers

- Maximum Vertical and Transverse Loadings as described for Intermediate Tower (A1) resolved for the

specified wind span, weight span (maximum and minimum) and deviation angle (maximum and

minimum).

A3. Angle/Section and Heavy Suspension Towers

The loadings for these towers shall be any of the following four conditions, which in all cases include the

wind loadings as applied to Intermediate Towers (A1):

I. Angle Conditions: As for Angle Towers (A2);

II. Section Loadings: Nil deviation angle, maximum specified weight span and an unbalanced

longitudinal loading of 15% maximum working tension for all conductor and shieldwire attachment points;

III. Uplift Loadings: As above but with the specified negative weight span;

IV. Heavy Suspension: In special positions the tower may be used in locations of extra-long wind and

weight spans, using heavy suspension insulator sets. The electrical clearances are maintained either with

tension insulators or with heavy suspension insulators. The maximum wind span shall be derived from

tower capabilities as designated for (I) and (II) above. When plotting on the profile the conductor

attachment shall be lowered accordingly but need not be allowed in calculating the height of the lowest

crossarm.

A4. Dead End Towers

Loadings for Dead End Towers shall be vertical and wind loadings as for straight line supports together

with transverse and longitudinal components of maximum conductor and shieldwire tension resolved for the

specified entry angles (maximum and minimum).

In addition the towers shall be designed for slack spans having a maximum tension of 9000N per

subconductor and 5000N per shieldwire acting in any plan angle of deviation from 0° to 90° to incoming

line and from horizontal to 45° in vertical plane.





The towers shall be designed for two shieldwires on single circuit and three on double circuit tower slack

spans towards substation. Auxiliary conductor and shieldwire crossarms shall be designed for larger angle of

deviation into substation.

The Dead End Towers shall be also designed to be used as Angle Towers with extra large angles of line

deviation (60°-90°); the loadings for this case shall be computed as for Angle Towers (A2).).

A5. Road Crossing Towers for Wooden Pole 132kV lines

Loadings for Road Crossing Towers shall be vertical and wind loadings as for straight line supports

together with longitudinal components of maximum conductor and shieldwire tension resolved for the

specified entry angle.

In addition the towers shall be designed for slack span towards wooden pole terminal structure having a

maximum tension of 9000N per subconductor and 5000N per ADSS cable acting in any plane of deviation

from 0° to 45° to the crossing span.

B. Unbalanced (Security) Loadings

Two conditions of unbalanced loadings shall be considered in the design of towers: B1. Broken Wire

Conditions

Intact wires vertical and transverse loadings shall be computed as for normal (climatic) conditions. Broken

wires vertical and transverse loadings shall be computed for specified wind and weight spans. The wind on

structure shall be computed as for normal (climatic) conditions.

In addition to the above the following longitudinal loadings shall be considered:

- Suspension structures: unbalanced longitudinal force at maximum working conductor or shieldwire

tension due to the breakage of one complete phase or the shieldwire. In case of phase breakage only the pull on

the suspension structure may be assumed to be reduced to 70% of the maximum working tension.

Angle, Section, Dead End and Road Crossing structures: full unbalanced longitudinal forces at maximum

working tension due to the simultaneous breakage of up to two adjacent complete phases on the same side of

the structure or the shieldwire.

Calculation of stresses in tower members under broken wire loading shall be made for the worst conditions of

loading of that particular member for the range of loading for which the tower may be employed.

For section towers the design shall take into account of the possibility that the unbalanced tensions referred to

in clause A3 (II) and (III) may act either in the same direction as broken wire forces, or in opposite direction,

applying increased torsion moments to the tower body. No allowance shall be taken of any movement of the

tower.

B2. Anti-cascade Conditions

- The longitudinal loadings corresponding to conductor and shieldwire tension for Every Day Conditions

shall be applied to all phase conductor and shieldwire attachment points simultaneously. For towers fitted

with suspension insulator sets the pull may be assumed to be reduced to 70% of the Every Day Tension.

No allowance shall be taken of any movement of the tower.

- Vertical loadings shall correspond to the specified weight span supported by the tower for this case.

- Transverse loadings consist in the transverse components of conductor and shieldwire tension for Every

Day Conditions resolved for the specified deviation angle.





C. Construction & Maintenance (C&M) Loadings

Construction and Maintenance loadings result from conductor installation, conductor sagging, tower

backstaying etc. In calculating the maximum working loads the initial conductor and shieldwire tension at

minimum temperature, still air shall be used.

The C&M loadings shall be applied to all phase conductor and shieldwire attachment points. Where

appropriate these loadings shall also be applied to the corresponding maintenance points e.g. the vertical

maintenance attachment points whilst the longitudinal is applied to the horizontal maintenance plates.

All members with an inclination of less 45° to the horizontal shall be checked for the effects of point

loading of 1500N at the most onerous position.

No other loading shall be considered under this condition.

2.6.5 Factor of Safety

The Working loadings computed above shall be multiplied by the specified factors of safety as follows:

- Intermediate Tower under Normal (Climatic) loadings: 2.0

- Angle/Tension, Dead End and Road Crossing Towers under Normal (Climatic) loadings: 2.5

- All structures under Unbalanced (Security) loadings: 1.5

- All structures under Construction & Maintenance loadings 1.75

Foundations for all structures shall be designed to have a factor of safety not less than that for the

structures.

Design tests on selected structures and foundations will be required to be carried out to prove compliance

with the specified factor of safety.

2.6.6 Steel; Allowable Ultimate Unit Stresses

All steels shall comply with BS EN 10025 as appropriate, unless otherwise specified and shall be suitable for

all the usual fabrication processes. The quality of finished steel shall be in accordance with BS EN 10163.

Unless otherwise specified, the following grades of steel shall be applicable:

a) Mild Steel shall be of minimum grade S235JR

b) High Tensile Steel shall be of minimum grade S355JR for section less than 20mm thick and S355JO for

section greater or equal to 20mm thick.

Steel section profiles shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 4:Part 1, BS 4848:Part4 and BS EN

10056-2 as appropriate.

Hot rolled steel plates shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 10029.

The allowable ultimate unit stresses used in the determination of the nominal strength of tower members

shall be based on specifications from ASCE Manual No. 52, ANSI/ASCE 10-97 and/or BS DD133.

2.6.7 Bolts and Nuts; Bolted Joints

Where appropriate all metal parts shall be secured with bolts and nuts with single spring washers. When in

position all bolts shall project through the corresponding nuts by at least three threads but such projection

shall not exceed 10mm.





No screwed thread shall form part of a shearing plane between members.

The nuts of all bolts attaching phase conductor insulator sets, shieldwire sets, maintenance brackets/plates

shall be locked in an approved manner, preferably by locknuts.





The bolts of any one diameter in a tower shall be one grade of steel.

Bolts and nuts shall be ISO Metric Block Hexagon to BS 4190, and shall threaded ISO Metric Coarse Pitch to

BS 3643:Part 2, Tolerance Class 7H/8g.

Single core spring washer shall comply with BS 4464, Type B.

2.6.8 Tower Design Documentation

The Contractor shall submit to PDO the following designs for each tower type:

a) wire clearance diagram;

b) loading diagram;

c) tower design calculation in an approved format;

d) when requested the load for each member for each loading case shall be made available;

e) foundation loadings;

f) wire clearance diagram for each terminal and special connection

g) panel assembly drawings

h) erection drawings

i) stub setting diagrams

j) stub calculations and drawings

Panel assembly drawings shall show all materials in place, complete with all fabrication and connection

details. A complete tabulation listing all pieces for the portion of the tower detailed shall be shown on each

drawing.

Each erection diagram shall show one tower panel, together with a key diagram indicating its location on the

complete tower. Each piece shall be identified by its mark number.

The Contractor shall make all changes to the detail (fabrication) and the erection drawings which PDO

determines necessary to make the finished tower fabrication conform to the requirements and intent of this

specification.

2.6.9 Tower Accessories

Tower accessories shall be provided as per the requirements of Appendix T8.

2.6.10 Support Earthing 2.6.10.1 General

All towers shall have a continuous earth path from the overhead earthwire to the earthing device/devices in the

ground. The tower steelwork is assumed to provide the earth path from the earthwire bonding

connection to the tower base. Tower earthing shall generally meet the requirements of BS 7430:1991.

The shieldwire shall be bonded to the tower steelwork at each tower. Approved clamps and bonding leads

shall be used for this purpose.

2.6.10.2 Standard Earthing

a) For bored pile foundations, a continuous length of stranded copper conductor shall be placed down the





full length of the bore, in contact with the soil at the base, prior to concreting and at diagonally opposite legs of

the tower.

b) For excavated foundations, a coil of stranded copper conductor shall be installed in and around the edge

of the excavation prior to concreting and connected to the tower steel above ground level.

Detailed drawings for Standard Earthing are given in Appendix E1.

2.6.10.3 Additional Earthing

Where individual footing resistance exceed 10 Ω with the standard earthing, or such other values as may be

agreed with the PDO, additional earthing shall be installed.

This shall be one of the following:

a) Two 60 m lengths of standard copper counterpoise buried 1 m below ground and connected to the other

two legs of the tower. These shall be buried in opposite directions along the route of the line.

b) As an alternative, earth rods may be installed in bored holes. Detailed drawings for Additional Earthing

are given in Appendix E2.

2.6.10.4 Special Earthing

In inhabited areas and at road crossing, special measures shall be undertaken to protect the public against

step and touch voltages.

At locations advised by PDO, the Standard Earthing shall be fitted to all four legs. In addition, a ring of

stranded copper earthing conductor shall be installed at a minimum depth of 1m, at a distance of 1m outside the

tower steelwork, and connected to the tower leg/earthing system.

Additional rings of earthing conductor shall be installed 1m apart and similarly connected, if calculations

indicate this to be necessary to limit step and touch voltages to tolerable levels. Calculations shall be

submitted to the PDO for approval.

Detailed drawing for Special Earthing is given in appendix E3.

2.6.10.5 Connection between Terminal Tower and Substation Earthing System

The terminal tower shall be connected to substation earthing system as per detailed drawing in Appendix E4.

2.7. MANUFACTURING

2.7.1 Workmanship

The work shall be carried out in a thoroughly reliable and workmanlike fashion in order to ensure

satisfactory assembly and erection, interchangeability of similar members, accuracy of dimensions, position

and alignment of holes.

Punched holes, shall wherever practicable, be jig, NC or CNC punched true to form and free from rags,

burrs and distortions. Punches and dies shall be strictly monitored to ensure that any producing irregular

holes or defects previously mentioned shall be immediately replaced. Drilled holes shall be clean, free from

burrs and square to the surface of the material.

Hole diameters in the black unless specified to the contrary. For bolts up to but not including 30 mm

diameter - nominal diameter + 1.5 mm. For bolts 30 mm diameter or greater - nominal diameter + 2.0 mm.

Cutting of materials by either cropping, shearing, guillotining will be permitted up to and including the





thickness specified below:

Quality (subgrade)

Materials of either greater thickness or higher quality (subgrade) must be either machine flame-cut or cold

sawn. Hand held flame cutting is not permitted.

Where materials are cropped, sheared or guillotined, the finished edge shall be free form rags, burrs,

notches and distortions. Flame-cutting of grade S355 steel shall be preceded by a slight pre-heat by passing the

cutting flame over the area to be cut and the cutting speed reduced in comparison to those normally used for

Grade S275 steels of similar thickness. Every effort shall be made to avoid having the flame-cut edge in

tension, especially in grade S355. The flame-cut edges shall be lightly dressed after cutting to remove

notches etc.

Punching full sized holes will be permitted up to and including the thickness specified below:

Quality (subgrade)

JR - 16 mm JO - 20 mm

No hole shall be punched where the thickness of the materials exceeds the finished diameter of the hole.

Finished holes shall be true to form and free from rags, burrs and distortion.

Materials of either greater thickness or higher quality (sub-grade) must be either drilled to final diameter or

punched 2 mm undersize and reamed or core drilled to final diameter.

The welding up of misplaced holes is not permitted without the prior approval of PDO. In the case where

approval is granted, the new hole must be drilled where it passes through or adjacent to the weld are of the

previous hole irrespective of material grade or thickness.

All bends in Grades S355J0 and S355J2G3 steel over 90 in 1000 shall be made hot within the temperature

range of 850°C to 1000°C, but normal cold correction will be permitted. Means shall be provided for the

random checking of temperatures (eg. Tempilstiks or Pyrometer).

Bends in Grade S235JR and S275JR steel plates up to 10 mm thick may be made cold up to and including

1175 in 1000.

Bends, open and close flanges in angle sections may be made cold up to and including 600 in 1000. However,

in both of the above cases, the Contractor shall take adequate precautions to avoid the risk of

subsequent galvanising embrittlement.

Bends shall be of even profile and free from surface damage due to press tools indentations.

The formation of bends by the “cut and weld” method unless specified on the drawings, is not permitted

without prior approval of the PDO.

2.7.2 Galvanising

Unless otherwise specified after completion of all fabrication processes (including all drilling, punching,

stamping, cutting, bending and welding) tower steelwork, including nuts, bolts and washers shall be hot-dip

galvanised and tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 729. The weight of coating shall be heavy

galvanizing as specified on Appendix T5.

Electro-galvanising is not an acceptable alternative.

The minimum average coating thickness shall be as specified in Appendix T5.

Excessively thick or brittle coatings due to high levels of silicon or phosphorus in the steel, which may

result in an increased risk of coating damage and/or other features that make the final product non-fit-for-

purpose shall be cause for rejection.





The ingot zinc used for galvanising shall comply with the requirements of BS 3436.

All materials prior to galvanising shall be free from oil, grease or any substance, which may adversely

affect the quality of finish.

The preparation for galvanising and the galvanising itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical

properties of the coated materials.

Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be treated with Sodium Dichromate in order to prevent wet

storage stains (white rust) during storage and transport.

All bolts and screwed rods, including the threaded portions, shall be galvanised. The threads shall be

cleaned of all surplus spelter by spinning or brushing. Dies shall not be used for cleaning threads other than on

nuts. Nuts shall be galvanised and tapped 0.4 mm oversize and threads shall be oiled.

Bolts shall be delivered with nuts run up the full extent of the thread.

All galvanised materials shall be stored on packing, clear of the ground and away from all materials that

might stain or corrode the galvanising. Black steel packing or bins shall not be used.

2.7.3 Test Requirements 2.7.3.1 General

Routine tests on raw material and fabricated individual members (components) of lattice steel towers shall be

undertaken in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. Prototype (type) tests on lattice steel

towers shall be undertaken when required by PDO in accordance with the requirements of IEC60652.

All steel ex-mills or received from merchants' stocks shall be marked to identify the cast or casts from

which it was made in accordance with Section 9 of BS EN 10025, and be covered by a test (mill) certificate

stating the mechanical, chemical and where specified the impact properties and carbon equivalent value and

clearly showing the cast numbers; to prove compliance with tables 2 and 5 of BS EN 10025.

In the event of test certificates being unobtainable, the Contractor shall arrange, at his own cost, for the

independent testing and analysis of materials. Testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN

10025, Section 8.

The material grades of all individual pieces of steel shall be capable of positive identification at all stages of

fabrication.

Steels of different quality shall be stored separately.

Bolts and nuts shall be covered by the appropriate test certificate in respect of the tests requirements stated in

BS 4190.

Copies of all test certificates shall be made available to PDO.

2.7.3.2 Galvanising

Tests for galvanised members and components shall be carried out at the works to ensure compliance with the

requirements of BS 729. The weight of coating shall be as specified on Appendix T5. Details of the test results

shall be made available to PDO upon request.

Certificates relating to the ingot zinc used for galvanising shall also be made available to PDO upon

request. When requested the fabricator shall, at his own cost, provide a pot melt analysis.

2.7.3.3 Tolerances





The fabrication tolerances after galvanising, which are not to be considered cumulative, shall be as follows:

(a) On linear dimensions of nominal sections as per BS 4, BS 4848 & BS EN 10056-2

(b) On overall length of member ±1mm

(c) On centres of holes ±1mm

(d) On centres of groups of holes ±2mm

(e) On back-gauges ±1mm

(f) On corresponding holes in opposite faces of angle or channel sections ±1mm

(g) On specified hole diameter on the punch side (in the black) or where drilled +0.3mm

-0mm

Version 2 Specification of Design of 132/220kV Overhead Power Lines on STEEL TOWERS

Appendix G1

SP-1114B Page G1-1 Dec 2016

(h) Taper on punched holes as measured between the specified hole diameter on the punch side and

the hole diameter on the die's side (in the black) shall not exceed+1mm

(i) On specified bends, open and close flanges ±20/1,000mm

The permitted tolerance from straightness after galvanising shall not exceed an offset of 1:1,000, except for

hollow sections, which shall not exceed 1:600, measured at the worst point. For members greater than 3

m in length, the offset shall be measured over any 3m length in the member.

2.7.3.4 Full Scale Load Test on Lattice Steel Towers

Full scale load test on each type of tower shall be carried out in accordance with IEC Publication

No. 60652.

The following requirements shall be considered for full scale load tests on lattice steel towers:

- All members of tested towers shall be of the same dimensions as those to be supplied according

to approved documents;

- The tower legs shall be anchored on test facility foundation in the same manner as the stub angles

on site;

- A test programme shall be submitted for approval before tower test;

- The full scale test shall be continued to destruction for the specified loading case;

- The loads on tested tower shall be applied with similar devices as the approved insulator set fittings;

- Test samples shall be cut from members which failed in destruction test and from other

selected members after the test. The result of these tests shall be compared with the design for test

interpretation and conclusions;

- Each tower shall be tested with the maximum height extension;

- The test report shall include deflection records, certified calibration reports and records,

photographs showing the test set-ups and nature of all failures and all documents specified by IEC

Publication No. 60652;

- The proven designs (with existing test reports on already tested lattice steel towers) may be

acceptable if adequately documented and test parameters are equal or more demanding than those specified;

- Each loading full scale test on steel lattice towers shall be attended by the client representatives.

3. Foundations

3.1. GENERAL This specification is providing the necessary instructions for detailed design of standard foundations

families or for typical foundation designs for specific overhead line projects.

Only installation instructions resulted from design requirements are presented in this specification, but full

details on this subject shall be provided in the Installation Specifications for 132kV and 220kV Overhead

Power Lines.

Typical foundation shall be prepared for a range of ground conditions occurring along the line route

as follows: normal ground, sand dunes, soft rock, hard rock, wadis / submerged conditions and erosion,

soft soil / subkha.

Where the actual soil conditions encountered show that the foundation can not be accommodated

technologically or economically by the typical foundation, a special foundation shall be designed.


Appendix G2


The type of foundations to be used at each tower location shall be the most suitable practical solution

approved by PDO.

The Contractor shall complete the design of each foundation type for different soil type, in accordance with

the results from site investigation. The foundation type for each tower location shall be selected by the

Contractor to suit its particular site condition and the installation criteria shall be approved by PDO.

The foundations shall be designed and erected to safely prevent overturning, uplift, soil failure and sliding.

Consideration shall be given to the risk of soil settlement due to horizontal and vertical moments

or rotations as a result of the compression on soil. These moments shall not exceed the acceptable

tolerances for the safe operation of the structure. The risk of settlements shall be taken into

consideration for foundations in cohesive soil and loosely stratified cohesionless soil.

The influence of ground water shall be also considered. Below the ground water table, the foundations

shall be designed such that tension or no pressure areas will not develop at the foundation base level.

Shallow foundations are preferable only where ground water table is high.

Towers shall not be erected until the concrete has cured for 10 days. Conductor and overhead ground

wire shall not be installed on the towers until the concrete footings have cured for 28 days.

3.2. SOIL INVESTIGATION

3.2.1 General

The Soil Investigation initial sample should be provided by PDO. The Contractor shall be responsible

for ascertaining that the sub-soil condition at each tower site is suitable for the chosen type of footing.

For this reason the Contractor shall carry out the detailed soil investigations in accordance with the PDO

standard ERD-11-02: Site Selection and Soil Investigation Manual.

According to the terrain variation and requirements of ERD-11-02, the Contractor shall propose the

program of detailed soil investigation for PDO's approval.

3.2.2 Depth of soil investigation

In addition to the criteria specified in the ERD-11-02, the soil investigations for 132kV and 220kV tower

foundations shall comply with the following requirements:

a) Investigation shall be as near as possible to the tower centre peg.

b) Depth of investigation shall be as follows:

– For pad and chimney, concrete block or grillage footings: depth of the foundation plus 2.5

times the bottom pad width.

– For drilled shaft or piled foundations: 3m or 5 times the shaft diameter (whichever is

greater) below the shaft depth.

– For footing in rock or very hard soils (Nspt>50): at least 2m.

– For test foundation: at least 1m below the base.

c) Time lapse between the investigation and foundation installation shall take into consideration

the effect on geotechnical features due to seasonal variations of humidity, ground water level etc.

3.2.3 Soil investigation reports

The Soil Investigation Report should be prepared in accordance with the requirements of ERD-11-02. The

draft report shall be presented to PDO by a qualified geotechnical engineer. All agreed amendments shall be

incorporated in the report after examination of the draft report by PDO.


Appendix G3


3.3. FOUNDATION DESIGN

3.3.1 General

The foundations shall be designed in accordance with internationally recognized standards (BS 8004,

VDE 0210, Eurocodes).

Foundations shall be designed for the ultimate limit state imposed by the appropriate maximum

simultaneous system loading condition on the tower.

Where appropriate, serviceability limit states shall also be considered. The geotechnical design of the

foundation shall be based on accepted codes of practice.

All foundations shall be designed to withstand uplift, settlement and overturning (as appropriate)

when subjected to the applied system loading. Allowances shall be made in the foundation design for

hydrostatic pressure where this may occur and the effects of seasonal rains, drying out, cyclic

loading and wind induced vibration of support members.

The Contractor shall submit the following design submissions to PDO:

- Foundation design calculations;

- Foundation general arrangement drawing;

- Slope stability analysis (where appropriate);

- Foundation setting template.

For all soil other than hard rock, the total depth of foundation below the ground level shall not be less than

1.5 m for 132kV towers and 1.75 m for 220kV towers.

The maximum depth of foundation (except piled or drilled shaft footings) shall not be more than 2.5

times the width of the bottom dimension of the pad.

The footing shall be cast monolithically. Soft rock foundation shall be designed for locations where

soft rock occurs for more than 50% of the depth.

The foundation shall be designed to satisfy all specified loading conditions.

The thickness of concrete in the chimney portion of the tower footing shall provide minimum cover of not

less than 100mm from any part of the stub angle to the nearest outer surface of the concrete at all dry

locations.

The chimney top must be at least 250 mm above ground level and also the caping shall be extended up to

the lower most joint level. At least 75mm thick lean concrete pad will be provided below foundations

as blinding concrete layer. Cover to all reinforcement shall be not less than 75mm, unless

mentioned otherwise. 25 mm x 25 mm chamfers are to be provided along all external angles of exposed

concrete.

The foundation shall be so designed that the Centre of Gravity of tower leg coincides with the Centre

of Gravity of chimney and Centre of Gravity of chimney coincides with the Centre of Gravity of base

pyramid or slab whichever is provided. In case this provision is not followed, the resultant

eccentricities and additional forces because of eccentricities shall be considered in the design of

foundations.

The foundation strength design shall ensure safety against all stress resultants (shear, bending and axial

stress) for ultimate compression or uplift load conditions along with accompanying site trusts as per

standard civil engineering practice.

3.3.2 Design Requirements


Appendix G4


The following types of foundations shall be considered:

3.3.2.1 Pad and Chimney Foundations with or without Undercut Pad

Pad and chimney foundations are recommended in dry normal good and poor soil, in sub-merged normal

soils and at locations where the soft rock occurs for more than 50% of foundation setting depth.

Pad and chimney foundation with undercut could be adopted in firm cohesive soils which stand up on

vertical excavation lines and undercut on the pad. This type of foundation could be also suitable when soft

rock occurs for more than the bottom 50% of the foundation setting depth. The soft rock encountered

may be of a homogenous limestone or coral nature or of a harder limestone or other rock but being

fissured and stratified. The soft rock foundation shall be suitable for both conditions.

The concrete pad shall be cast to the edge of the excavation for minimum height of 250 mm in order to gain

assistance by adhesion to the undisturbed ground. The pad may be undercut into the surrounding ground for

a minimum 250 mm outside of vertical edges of the excavation. The undercut angle shall be of about 60° to

the horizontal.

Where concrete block foundations are used, concrete cover of at least 100 mm it is to be provided over any

steel part.

The slope of concrete pyramid top faces to horizontal shall be not less than 45° for plain concrete pad.

Excavations for concrete pad and column type footing shall be carried out so that the concrete pad can be

poured against undisturbed earth. Concrete pad and column shall be formed so that they can be poured in

one monolithic pour with no construction joint in the concrete between pad and column.

After concrete has cured, suitable backfill shall be installed in 300mm lifts and compacted with air tamps

to 95% density.

All concrete shall be installed in accordance with ERD-19-07.

The base slab shall be checked for stresses due to bending moment and shear force arising during down

trust or uplift loading, while the chimney shall be designed as a composite section for combined action of

compression or tension force and associated bending moments from horizontal shear.

Reinforced concrete chimneys shall be designed to withstand the maximum resultant horizontal residual

shear component, with due allowance given where appropriate to resultant lateral (passive) earth pressure of

the backfill.

No allowance shall be made of the minimal strength of concrete in tension and the stub shall not

be considered as providing any part of the tensile area of reinforcing steelwork.

Foundations for lattice steel tower legs with high hillside shear force, due to certain combinations

of unequal leg extensions may however differ from those designed for level ground by the addition of

extra reinforcement in the chimney.

For soft rock a similar type of foundation may be used, where reinforced concrete block is cast-in-situ

against the undisturbed rock in conjunction with undercut at the lower edge. Uplift resistance is assumed

to be resisted by the skin friction developed at the concrete-rock interface and an inverted frustum in any

soil- rock overburden.

3.3.2.2 Rock Anchor Foundation

This type of footing is recommended for homogenous hard rock occurring less than 1 m below ground

level. The anchors are normally fixed in a reinforced concrete cap.

Anchor foundations may be used where the rock mass is sound, homogenous, free from fissures and where

the long term stability of the rock can be ensured. All design methods and procedures shall be in

accordance with the recommendations of BS 8081.

The foundation shall comprise a reinforced concrete pad below ground level in conjunction with


Appendix G5


suitably designed anchor grouted into holes previously drilled into the rock.

Where the arrangement of the anchorage is such that the horizontal shear loads are not designed to be

wholly or partially taken by the anchor acting in tension, such horizontal loads, or any balance thereof shall

be catered for in the design of the concrete pad.

In order to obtain the required uplift resistance, the deformed reinforcing bars shall be grouted into

holes drilled in rock, embedded with an expanding grout for a minimum depth of 1.2 m from the bottom

of the cap. The reinforcing bars shall be tied together within the foundation cap which shall be set into the

rock for a minimum depth of 750 mm.

The stub leg shall set into the cap for a minimum depth of 900 mm and sufficient cleats and bolts shall be

fitted to the stub to transfer 100% of the leg load. The upper part of the stubs shall be encased in concrete

to a height of 250mm above ground level.

The actual depth of anchorage in rock shall be computed according to relevant standard requirements.

Type testing of the anchor and anchorage system is required in each ground type and proof testing shall be

carried out on one anchor at each tower leg.

3.3.2.3 Pile Foundations

Pile foundations can be normally of bored cast-in-situ reinforced concrete piles or pre-cast concrete driven

piles. The foundations can be single or multiple piles fixed in a reinforced concrete cap.

Where the route is through subkha, aggressive soils, sand dunes areas or wadis, a permanent casing shall be

considered for piled foundations.

Pile foundations shall be constructed in poor soils (subkha) or in wadis or in areas of aggressive soils. In

such areas a permanent steel casing is recommended to a depth of 2 m below ground level and extended to

the top of concrete.

Piled foundations in sand dunes areas shall have similar permanent steel casing to the top 3 m of the pile.

Permanent casing can be applied for both bored cast-in-situ or driven piles according to requirements from

soil report.

This type of foundations are recommended for poor soils and submerged soils conditions, but can be

also applied in normal or hard soil conditions, where an economic or technical advantage can be

demonstrated.

In order to minimise the horizontal shear, raked piles are recommended. If the piles are set vertically, they

shall be designed to withstand the full horizontal shear.

The friction value shall be assumed based on soil report. The skin friction on casing shall be assumed

zero. The foundation design shall check the capacity of the pile to sustain the uplift and compression load

by its weight and skin friction. When insufficient uplift capacity is obtained in this way, a mass of

concrete cap suitably fixed to the pile can be considered.

Piled foundations can be of raked or vertical single pile per leg or:

– Multiple piled foundations using raked piles:

The pile loads shall be determined by the summation of the horizontal and vertical components of

the reactions at ground level. One multiple pile foundation shall be constructed for each leg, and since the

pile group provides all the lateral stability, no interconnecting ground beam between the legs are

required. Raked piles are not to be used where ground settlement is likely to impose unacceptable bending

stresses in the piles.

– Multiple piled foundations using vertical piles:

This type shall be used when ground settlement is likely to impose unacceptable bending stresses on


Appendix G6


raked piles, or where the type of pile cannot be installed raked due to economic or technologic conditions.

In this case lateral stability shall be provided by the passive resistance of the ground acting on the piles,

pile cap and their interconnecting ground beams, where needed.

Ultimate uplift resistance shall be obtained assuming the actual weight of piles, pile caps etc. plus

the guaranteed ultimate uplift resistance of the piles. Allowance shall be made for buoyancy effects.

Ultimate compressive loads shall include the superimposed weight of soil, pile caps (and tie-beams,

etc.) multiplied by the safety factor and shall be obtained by the guaranteed ultimate resistance of the piles.

3.3.2.4 Drilled shaft foundations

Drilled shaft foundations can be of single or multiple drilled shaft embedded in reinforced concrete pad.

Drilled shaft foundations shall comprise either a large diameter single shaft suitably under-reamed (belled)

at the base, or multiple small diameter drilled shafts suitably connected at or below ground level by a

concrete cap. The use of an under-ream will be dependent upon the soil conditions present and the

proposed method of installation including quality control procedures proposed.

The average skin friction or adhesion per unit area of shaft shall be determined from either the

soil properties measured on samples in an undrained triaxial compression test, calculated from SPTs, or

from CPTs. The average value shall be taken over the effective length of the shaft.

The suction of the shaft base shall be not assumed to be greater than 8% of the uplift capacity. The average

value of the skin friction/adhesion shall be taken for the cap design.

For single large diameter shaft foundations the main reinforcement shall be adequate to carry the total

load on the full length of the foundation. Link spacing shall not exceed 150 mm in the area of overlap

of the main reinforcing with the stub. Elsewhere the average link spacing shall not exceed 300 mm, and

links shall be formed from a minimum of 8 mm diameter mild steel reinforcement.

As result of soil investigation or for economical reasons can be necessary to use special types of

foundations (concrete blocks, steel grillage, steel pile foundations etc.).

3.3.3 Foundation selection

The Contractor shall complete the design of the typical foundations for all soils type in accordance to

the soil investigation report. The foundation type for each tower site shall be selected from the

considered typical foundation to suit its particular site conditions.

The following foundation types shall be considered (but not limited to):

– Pad and chimney with or without undercut (concrete block foundation);

– Rock anchor foundations;

– Drilled shaft foundations with or without underbelly (single or multiple shaft);

– Piled foundations (single or group of piles per leg);

– Raft and specials foundations for submerged conditions, wadis, and sand dunes.

The following categories of soils shall be considered:

a) Hard rock of homogenous solid rock is encountered within one meter of ground surface;

b) Soft rock - homogeneous fractured limestone or weathered, stratified rock occurring for complete

depth of foundation (100% soft rock) or for 50% of the foundation depth (50% soft rock);

c) Normal soil - soil reasonably compact or stiff;

d) Poor soil - silty sand, silty clay of weak strength with or without layers of gravel, unconsolidated

sands, subkha;


Appendix G7


e) Special soil conditions - like in wadis (watercourse beds) subject to occasional flooding, sand

dunes areas etc.

Recommended Selection of the Foundation Type

a)

b)

Hard rock:

Soft rock

Anchor rock foundation.

−

−

100% soft rock:

50% soft rock:

Anchor rock, drilled shaft, concrete block foundation.

Drilled shafts, pad and chimney/concrete block foundation.

c) Normal soil: Pad and chimney foundations, drilled shaft (single or multiple).

d) Poor soil: Pad and chimney foundations, piled foundations, raft foundations.

e) Special soil condition: Piled foundations, raft foundations, caissons etc.

3.3.4 Loads on foundations

The foundations shall be designed to withstand the reactions at tower / structure base considering

appropriate factors of safety as specified.

The above base reaction with appropriate factors of safety shall further be multiplied by a factor of 1.1

for the check against overturning, sliding or uplift.

The base reaction shall be composed of following:

- Ultimate uplift load

- Ultimate compression load

- Ultimate horizontal loads for both uplift and compression case.

3.3.5 Stability analysis 3.3.5.1 Resistance against Uplift Loads

Uplift resistance is assumed to be provided by the mass of soil within the inverted frustum of a

pyramid constructed from the upper edge of the pad, or the lower edge for a pyramid. Where the pad

is poured against undisturbed soil or undercut, the frustum may be constructed from the lower edge of

the pad. The angle of the frustum depending on the soil properties and due consideration shall be taken

of buoyancy effects, reduced densities of backfill and design test results.

In no case shall the angle to vertical of the sides of the assumed frustrum be greater than 30°.

All foundations on slopes greater than 1:4 shall be checked for stability against rotation. Where

appropriate, decrease in soil bearing resistance shall also be considered.

The overall long term stability of the slope, including any proposed slope modifications for

constructional purposes e.g. benching shall be considered by an approved geotechnical consultant.

The following shall be considered for stability analysis:

- The increase in ground reaction caused by a moment due to horizontal shear;

- The reduction of uplift capacity caused by the moment resulted from horizontal shear;

- The sliding due to horizontal shear.

The weight of concrete embedded in this frustum of earth and that above the ground will be also

considered for resisting the uplift. When computing the uplift resistance the possible overlapping of frusta

of adjacent footings shall be considered. In the unavoidable cases, where frusta of earth pyramids of two

adjoining legs superimpose each other, the earth frustum of each leg shall be assumed truncated by a

vertical plane passing through the centre line of the tower base.


Appendix G8


Inverted frustum of earth procedure shall be applicable in normal and poor type of ground (not rocky) and

the depth of the footing is less than 2.5 times the pad width.

Uplift resistance of the foundations in rock shall be computed with the ultimate shear stress applied over

the surface area derived from the perimeter of the undercut in plan and the thickness of soft rock in

elevation.

The weight of the frustum of earth above the rock surface and starting its base from undercut plan area shall

be added. Allowance shall be made for loss of uplift resistance due to overlap of frusta where applicable.

Resistance against sliding shall be guaranteed by casting the concrete against rock surface.

3.3.5.2 Resistance against compression loads

The down thrust loads shall be resisted by bearing capacity of the soil at the bottom of the footing.

For design under compression loading the area of the base is determined by the bearing capacity of soil

under ultimate loads. In assessing the bearing pressure beneath the foundation, the additional weight of

the foundation over that of the displaced soil shall be multiplied by the appropriate safety factor.

3.3.5.3 Resistance against shear loads

Side trust shall be resisted by passive pressure of soil on the side of the chimney and by the soil

pressure acting against the foundation pad or pyramid. In case the passive pressure on the chimney face

does not cover the side trust, effect of the moment on the base pressure shall be taken into account in

the stability check.

In rocky soil, the passive pressure on chimney and foundation shall be taken as zero if the backfill is not

a suitably compacted with normal soil mixture.

The permissible total settlement of foundation shall not be more than 50 mm while differential

settlement between any two legs shall not be more than 25 mm.

3.4. FOUNDATION DESIGN DATA

3.4.1 Safety Factors

Safety factors to be applied for foundation design:

− For normal (climatic) working loading cases for suspension towers 2.0

− For normal (climatic) working loading cases for angle/tension towers 2.5

− For unbalanced (security) loading cases 1.5

− Foundations under construction & maintenance load for all types of towers 1.75

− Additional factor of safety applied to all foundations and loading cases above

(see paragraph 3.3.4) 1.1

− Concrete for pile design acc. to BS 8110 or

DIN 1045

3.4.2 Soil characteristics to be considered for foundation design

When selecting the foundation for each site, the geotechnical characteristics from soil report for each

location shall be checked in order to apply the suitable type of foundation. The assumed soil characteristics

for different soil conditions shall be according to Appendix F3


Appendix G9


3.5. INSTALLATION TOLERANCES The centre peg of the foundation for an intermediate support shall not depart from longitudinal profile

position by more than 300 mm and not more than 25 mm from central axis of the line section (except where

an offset is required according to overhead line design).

Stubs shall be held firmly in position by a stub setting template or other device while the forms concrete is

placed. This support shall be maintained until removal of the forms, or for drilled shaft, anchor and pile

caps, monoblocks, rafts etc until a minimum period of 48 hours has elapsed after concreting. Table 3-1

Dimensions Setting Tolerance

Tower base dimension

Tower base diagonal dimension Rake of stub from required hip

slope

Level of the stub

– Maximum difference in level between all four stubs of a

foundation

– Maximum difference between the mean levels of pairs of

diagonally opposite stubs

Twist of stub in plane

± 10mm or ± 0.1% of face dimension

(whichever is greater)

± 15 mm or ± 0.1% of diagonal dimension

(whichever is greater)

1:100 ± 10mm or 0.05% of face diagonal

dimension (whichever is greater)

± 6mm

1° about longitudinal axis

Contractor shall require tower supplier to furnish stub setting templates for tower foundations. At least one

template shall be provided for each tower type with adjustments for each leg extension within that tower

type.

3.6. FOUNDATION TESTS

3.6.1 Concrete Block Foundations

Full scale foundations tests both design and routine/proof shall be undertaken on all types of foundations

where specified.

Tests shall, unless specified otherwise, be undertaken in accordance with the recommendations of IEC

Standard no. 61773/96.

When design tests are required, the sites selected shall be representative for the geotechnical conditions

throughout the length of the transmission line, in which the Contractor proposes to install that type of

foundation.

The Contractor shall submit to PDO the following information:

- Details of the test sites, including all geotechnical parameters;

- Details of the proposed test equipment, test layout, measuring equipment, test procedure and the

test programme.

The ultimate resistance of the foundation shall unless otherwise specified be determined from the lesser of:


Appendix G10


i) the resistance equivalent to a temporary displacement of 25 mm or,

ii) the resistance equivalent to a permanent displacement of 10 mm.

3.6.2 Anchor Foundation - Tests

Tests on anchor foundations shall comprise both tests on individual anchor and on the complete foundation.

Prior to the installation of anchor foundations on site, suitability tests in accordance with the requirements

of BS 8081 shall be undertaken on the required number of anchors.

Unless the Contractor can provide documented evidence (including test reports) of the correlation between

individual anchor resistance and the resistance of the complete foundation (group effects) design uplift tests

on the complete foundation shall be undertaken.

Routine acceptance tests in accordance with BS 8081 shall be undertaken on all anchors.

3.6.3 Piled Foundation

The pile tests shall be carried out according to internationally accepted standards as BS 8004 or DIN

standards.

The test pile(s) shall be constructed before the commencement of the main piling works in a manner similar

to that for the construction of the working piles. Test piles shall not be incorporated into the final works.

The test pile shall be deemed to comply with its specified ultimate load when, after the load is held for at

least 30 minutes, the following criteria are satisfied:

i) The displacement at the head of the pile is less than 25 mm or;

ii) The movement of the head of the pile shall be slowing down and less than 0.25 mm/hour:

iii) The displacement at the head of the pile after all loads is removed (after 10 minutes) is less than

10 mm.

3.6.4 Integrity Testing

Integrity tests using the acoustic wave method shall be undertaken by a specialist subcontractor appointed

by the Contractor, but subject to the agreement of PDO, on all drilled shaft and piled foundations. The

actual method of performing the tests and the interpreting the results shall be subject to PDO’s approval.

3.6.5 Earth Resistance

Earth electrical resistance tests shall be undertaken at each tower site prior to the erection of the earthwire.

On sites subject to seasonal variations in the rainfall, the levels of the water table and sites requiring special

earthing arrangements additional earth resistance tests shall be carried out at intervals to establish the

effects on the resistance of such seasonal variations.

The method of measurement and equipment to be used shall be subject to the approval of PDO.

The results of the earth resistance tests both initial and final i.e. after additional ice earthing has been

installed shall be forwarded to PDO.

3.7. TOWER SITE PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION Where specified support legs or foundations are in areas open to vehicle access, the Contractor shall install

barriers of a type approved by PDO to prevent vehicles coming into contact with the support of foundation.

Where foundations are installed on sloping or unstable ground the Contractor shall be responsible for

ensuring the stability of the area and the safety of the public, all to the satisfaction of PDO and local


Appendix G11


regulatory authorities.

Positioning of towers in the area of a wadi should be avoided as far as possible. If, however, it becomes

unavoidable to position a tower within the area of a wadi then the foundations and the bottom section of the

tower must be protected to above flood level against scouring and/or debris brought down by the flood

water.

Stabilisation shall be achieved by approved methods such as retaining walls, buttresses, sprayed concrete,

rock bolts, dowels or gabion baskets/mattresses.

Site assembly of gabion baskets and mattresses shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions. Gabions shall be placed in position prior to filling and secured to adjoining gabions with lacing

wire. Filling material shall be between 100 and 150 mm; 90 percent of the fill to be retained on a 100 mm

ring. The fill shall be tightly packed with no apparent voids, and shall be overfilled by 25-50 mm to allow

for settlement. Lids shall be laced immediately after filling.

Where necessary to prevent erosion and as stipulated by PDO, or the appropriate authority, surface drainage

channels shall be provided; surge chambers, stopped ends and sub lets shall be formed as required. Where

surface vegetation has been removed from sloping ground such that erosion could occur, the area shall be

reinstated by planting of grasses using hydro seeding methods or band sprigging.

4. Overhead Line Components

4.1. LINE CONDUCTORS & THE SHIELDWIRE

4.1.1 General

Line conductors shall be ELM and YEW All Aluminium Alloy Conductors (AAAC), the shieldwire shall

be Aluminium Alloy Conductor Aluminium Clad Steel Reinforced or OPGW electrically and mechanically

equivalent. All conductors shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61089.

The main data characteristics are given in Appendix C1.

4.1.2 System Loading Conditions

Reference shall be made to Appendix T7 for details of applicable phase conductor and OPGW system

loading.

4.1.3 Creep Prediction

The Contractor shall submit to PDO sufficient information and calculations based on the results of an

approved system of tests to reasonable predict the long-term creep characteristics of the conductors and the

shieldwire.

The Contractor shall also submit proposal for a creep compensation regime to be applied at the time of

stringing. Reference shall be made to the recommendations contained in CIGRE Electra No. 75 for creep

evaluation (equation 8, page 77 for All Aluminium Alloy Conductors).

Such a regime will typically involve prestressing of the conductors prior to sagging, together with sagging

of the conductors at initial tensions higher than final design tensions.

The regime shall be designed to compensate for the predicted creep of the conductors over its initial 10

years of service life.

4.1.4 Materials Aluminium alloy wire shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60104. The copper content shall not


Appendix G12


exceed 0.05%.

Aluminium clad steel wire shall comply with IEC 61232 and shall be of type A, class 20SA.

4.1.5 Workmanp

Precautions shall be taken during the manufacture, storage and delivery of conductors to prevent

contamination by copper or other materials, which may adversely, affect the aluminium or aluminium alloy.

Where permitted in IEC 61089 for aluminium or aluminium alloy wires the preferred method of jointing

single wires is cold pressure welding.

Aluminium clad steel shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61232.

4.1.6 Test Requirems 4.1.6.1 Conduos

Sample tests shall be undertaken on all conductors in accordance with the requirements of IEC 61089 as

applicable and this Specification.

The mechanical tests shall be taken on straightened samples of individual wires taken after conductor

stranding. In the event of the sample from any length not passing the mechanical or resistivity tests, a

second and third sample shall be taken from the same length, and if one of these also fails under test, the

length of conductor (ie. drum) from which it has been taken shall be rejected. For the ductility tests, should

any variation occur in the results between the torsion and elongation methods of testing the results of the

torsion test shall prevail.

In the event of any machinery used for conductor manufacture being used for materials other than

aluminium, galvanised or aluminium clad steel, the manufacturers shall furnish to PDO with a certificate

stating that the machinery has been thoroughly cleaned before use on aluminium, aluminium alloy,

galvanised or aluminium clad steel wire and that the conductor is free from contamination.

4.1.6.2 Aluminium Clad Steel

Tests for aluminium clad steel wire shall be carried out at the works to ensure compliance with the

requirements of IEC 61232. Details of the test results shall be made available to PDO upon request.

4.1.6.3 Test Certificate

All metallic materials used in the manufacture of conductors shall be covered by test certificates stating

their mechanical and chemical properties to prove compliance with this Specification and IEC as

appropriate.

These certificates shall be made available to PDO upon request.

Test records covering Type and Sample tests shall be made available to PDO.

4.1.6.4 Certificate of Conformity

When requested copies of the following certificate/records shall also be forwarded:

(a) Metallic material test certificate;

(b) Conductor stranding equipment non contamination certificate;

(c) Aluminium cladding test records.

4.2. OPTICAL FIBRE GROUND WIRE (OPGW) AND ACCESSORIES


Appendix G13


4.2.1 Groundwire Requirements

The Composite Overhead Groundwire shall comply with the relevant requirements of BS EN 187000, ITU-

T G652, IEC 60794 and IEEE Std 1138 unless otherwise stated in this specification.

The Composite Groundwire shall be described as per Appendix O1.

The composite overhead groundwire can be a combination of All Aluminium Alloy wires complying with

IEC 60104 and Aluminium Clad Steel wires complying to IEC 61232 and the fibre optic unit. The fibre

optic unit, which houses the optical fibres, shall be made of Aluminium Tube Structures (ATS) extruded

aluminium or Stainless Steel Tube cladded Aluminium Structure (SSTS cladded Al).

The optical fibres shall be effectively protected against mechanical forces such as vibrations, compression,

bending, twisting, crushing tensile stress etc, the environment, such as moisture, dust, hydrogen ingress,

atmospheric pollution etc. and lighting effects causing short and/or long term temperature rise.

The OPGW shall contains, beside the central member, two layers of strands at least, with opposite lay. The

outermost layer of OPGW shall be stranded with a right hand lay. The diameter of each strand of the

outermost layer shall not be less than 3.5mm.

The fibre optic unit could be located in the central or in the inner layer, but not in the outermost layer of

OPGW.

Consideration should be given to OPGW design to provide superior reliability on thermal resistance,

waterproofing, strain reduction to fibres, mechanical strength and corrosion resistance.

4.2.2 Optical Fibres

All fibres shall be of single mode type and shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 188000 or ITU-T

G652, IEC 60793 and IEEE Std1138 and the requirements detailed below.

The fibres shall be designated to operate at 1310 and 1550 nm wavelength and shall provide low dispersion

values for the entire bandwidth above the cut off wavelengths of the cabled fibres.

Fibres shall be laid loose and equally distributed into buffer tubes made of silicone resin and filled with

jelly compound. The fibres shall be manufactured from high-grade silica and dropped as necessary to

provide the required transmission performance.

The chemical composition of the fibres shall be specifically designed to minimise the effect of hydrogen on

the transmission properties.

The fibre primary coating shall consist in an inert material which can be readily removed for jointing

purposes without damage to the fibre and without necessitating the use of hazardous chemicals.

The secondary coating may be applied directly over the primary coating or alternatively a loose-jacket may

be provided. Where a tight fitting secondary coating is provided it should consist of an inert material.

The secondary coating or loose tube shall be colour coded throughout the length of the cable. If not part of

the material of the secondary coating, the colour coding shall be fast and capable of withstanding normal

handling during termination.

The fibre coating shall be translucent such that fibre splicing technique, using optical alignment of cores by

means of injection and detection of light through the cladding shall be supported. In addition, the fibre

coating shall be optically matched to the cladding to promote cladding mode stripping.

Fibres optic parameters shall be as per appendix O2.

4.2.3 Accessories for Optical Fibre Groundwire

The OPGW and fittings must be considered as a complete system operating together.

The OPGW manufacturers is required to provide a total solution including the fittings, which shall ensure

that the fittings shall not cause any damage to the cable or impair the performance of the OPGW during its


Appendix G14


lifetime.

It is required that the manufacturer provides relevant certificates proving that the fittings and the OPGW

had been successfully type tested together as a complete system. These tests shall include at least tensile

test, aeolian vibration fatigue test, and fault current test.

The manufacturer shall deliver all mounting hardware required for a complete operational OPGW. This

shall include, but not limited to, vibration dampers, suspension sets (with armour grip suspension clamp),

helical type tension sets, earth bonding leads, clamps for vertically mounting OPGW on tower steelwork,

joint boxes. For technical requirements reference is made to Appendix O3 and H1 as appropriate.

Junction box technology shall ensure only bottom cable entry, quick removal of box cover given access to

fibre splices. All jointing materials, sufficient for all splices (equal to 1.2 times the number of fibres,

including the splicing sleeves, heat shrinking protective tubes, splice holder and cable holder shall be

provided inside the box).

The vibration dampers shall be preferably of the stockbridge multi-frequency type. The dampers shall be

attached to the groundwire in a manner which will prevent conductor damage. If armour rods are required

(for second/third damper) these shall be supplied with the damper.

The Tenderers will supply performance diagram for the proposed damper and actual project conditions. The

Contractor shall supply the damping study in full details, including calculations and design details

sustaining that the bending strain is limited to a safe value, which shall not exceed 75μstrains in any case.

4.2.4 Test Requirements

The composite groundwire shall be inspected and tested in accordance with relevant standards as follows:

4.2.4.1 Performance Tests

Performance tests are intended to verify the basic design concept.

a) Optical Fibres: Performance tests on optical fibres shall be in accordance with IEC 60793 or BS

EN 188000 or IEEE Std 1138.

The following tests shall be carried out:

- attenuation;

- cut-off wavelength;

- mode field diameter;

- chromatic dispersion.

b) Complete OPGW: Performance tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEEE Std 1138 as

follows:

- water penetration test;

- short circuit test;

- aeolian vibration test;

- galloping test;

- sheave test;

- creep test;

- strain margin test;

- stress-strain test;

- temperature cycle test.

c) Joint boxes: Test certificates shall be submitted proving:

- The IP rating;


Appendix G15


- environmental and mechanical properties.

4.2.4.2 Sample Tests

The cable, fittings and joint boxes shall be subjected to inspection in accordance to a schedule proposed by

the manufacturer in order to prove that the design requirements are achieved. The sampling and schedules

of test shall be approved by PDO.

a) Optical fibres: Sample test shall be in accordance with IEC 60793 or BS EN 188000 or IEEE Std

1138.

b) Wire before standing and completed OPGW: Tests shall be carried out in accordance with

IEC standards or BS EN 187000 or IEEE Std 1138, including at least tensile strength &

elongation, electrical resistance, torsion tests and measurement of diameters, thickness of aluminium alloy

in ACS wires.

c) Chemical Tests

Each consignment shall have a chemical analysis report for the alloys employed in the construction of the

OPGW.

d) Routine tests: The manufacturer shall prepare and submit to PDO attenuation routine tests on all

fibres of all drums to be delivered at the wavelength of 1310 and 1550nm. The results shall include

the attenuation coefficient and attenuation profile of the fibres, in graphical form with graduated axes

(attenuation vs. distance).

4.2.5 Experience

The manufacturer of OPGW and the manufacturer of fittings and joint boxes shall have at least 10 years

experience in the design and manufacturing of all items of the system.

4.3. INSULATORS

4.3.1 General

The insulators shall be of the silicone rubber long rod type complying with IEC 61109 and/or ANSI

C29.11, with ball and socket type couplings in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60120, and of

forged steel and hot dip galvanised to a minimum of 126 microns.

It is a primary requirement that insulators shall provide satisfactory, troublefree, long-term performance in

service. Tenderers are required to demonstrate that the insulators offered will provide such performance and

shall include appropriate details with their Tender. The minimum submissions to satisfy this requirement

are as follows:

- The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 and maintain Engineering and Research

& Development sections to provide a technical/information service to purchasers.

- The manufacturer shall have had at least ten years experience of supplying similar

insulators/complete insulator strings to those specified, to major utilities worldwide.

- Details of satisfactory service performance under similar climatic conditions shall be provided

for similar insulators supplied by the manufacturer to utilities.

- A test certificate, or certificates, issued by an independent laboratory, proving successful testing

to IEC 61109, in respect of similar insulators supplied by the manufacturer.

The required insulators are specified in Appendix I1 and I2.

4.3.2 Design

The insulator shall be made from two insulating parts equipped with metal fittings. The internal insulating

part namely "core" will be designed and manufactured from Glass Fibre Reinforced Polymer rod. The


Appendix G16


specified creepage distance is provided with an external insulating part, namely "housing" (sleeve with

weathersheds), and will be manufactured from silicone rubber. The content of silicone shall be at least 30%

of the rubber mass, after adding the fillers.

The core shall be made of electrical grade epoxy and boron-free ECR glass fibres. The insulator core shall

be mechanically sound, free from voids, foreign substances and manufacturing flaws. Also the design shall

be such as to ensure that the core is totally encapsulated and fully sealed from the live to the earthed ends,

by the insulating material from the environment, in order to avoid moisture ingress.

Alternatively, E core material could be proposed if the design is proven by applicable type tests and if

supported by an adequate track record of successful experience in service.

The housing and weathersheds shall be made of Silicone Rubber material in order to maintain their

hydrophobicity during long term service in critical environments. It shall be applied to a subassembly of the

core and metal-fittings using a process of high pressure, high-temperature injection mould up. The material

for housing and weathersheds shall be of blue colour and bird repellent.

A minimum thick sheath of 3.0mm of Silicone Rubber shall be moulded on the reinforced fiber glass rod.

The polymer sleeve and weathershed insulating material shall have a chemical structure of 100 percent

silicone rubber before fillers are added. The Silicone Rubber shall be firmly bonded to the rod, be seamless,

smooth and free from imperfections. The interfaces joining the housing to the core, and those joining the

housing to the metal fittings, shall be uniform and without voids. The strength of the Silicone Rubber to rod

interface shall be greater than the tearing strength of the Silicon Rubber itself. An interface between the

metal fittings and the housing that relies on a compression process is not acceptable.

The alternating weathersheds shall be firmly bonded to the sheath, moulded as part of the sheath and be

seamless smooth and free from imperfections. Weathersheds shall be at intervals to provide optimum

electrical performance and the weathershed designs should provide a protected bottom surface that tends to

keep dry in wet conditions. Individual sheds shall be of open profile without under ribs and to IEC 60815.

The insulator shall be capable of high pressure live line washing. A high pressure wash test shall be

preformed on polymer insulators to demonstrate that the units can be power washed. This test shall be a

water spray at a shed seam approximately 3m from the insulators. The spray shall be a solid stream through

a ¼ inch diameter nozzle at 550 psi for a period of ten minutes. For washing a whole insulator, or 10

seconds for one point insulator surface there shall be no signs of water entering through or under the outside

weathershed into the core or between sleeve and weathersheds or at the polymer hardware interface into the

core.

The end fittings shall be made of ductile cast iron, or forged steel, or malleable cast iron all hot-dip

galvanised. The minimum thickness of the coating of the steel or iron fittings will be 126 micron

(900 g/m²). The end fittings shall be attached to insure a uniform distribution of the mechanical load to the

rod. Any member that is machined, bent or worked in manner after galvanising shall be regalvanised. The

zinc coating shall adhere tightly to the surface of the base metal. The zinc-coated parts shall be free from

uncoated spots. The coating shall be free from blisters, flux, black spots, dross, tear drop edges, flaking

zinc, rough appearance and in general shall be smooth, clean and unscarred when received.

The insulators to be used for 220kV lines shall be fitted with grading rings in order to reduce the electric

fields both in the air (reduction of corona and RIV levels) and inside the organic materials (reduction of

ageing). The Supplier of the Silicone Rubber insulators is obliged to supply these insulators complete with

a suitable ring properly fixed on the insulator. Full, detailed design and field distribution graphs shall be

submitted to justify the use of the proposed ring.


The schedule of minimum tests required is given in Appendix I3. In general, unless otherwise stated, tests

shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 61109.

Design Tests on silicone rubber insulator units should have been previously undertaken in full accordance

with the requirements of IEC 61109 including the ageing tests under operating voltage and simulated

weather conditions for duration of 5000h.


Appendix G17


These tests should have been certified by an independent quality assurance organisation, and the test

certificates made available to PDO for approval.

The Contractor shall give PDO the requisite period of notice prior to undertaking the test, and submit to

PDO for approval a test programme and procedures.

Routine tests

Tests made on all production insulators and/or their individual components to demonstrate their integrity. In

general they shall be performed according to IEC 61109, chapter 8.

Sample tests

Tests made on samples of completed insulators and/or their individual components to verify that product

meet the design specifications. In general they shall be performed according to IEC 61109, chapter 7.

Type tests

Tests required to be made before supplying a type of insulator covered by this Specification in order to

demonstrate satisfactory performance characteristics to meet the intended application and specified

conditions. In general they shall be performed according to IEC 61109, chapter 6. Copies of Certificates of

these tests shall be submitted with the Tender documents.

Design tests

Tests intended to verify the suitability of the design, materials and method of manufacture (technology).

4.3.4 Identification and Marking

All insulators shall be marked to ensure system traceability. Each unit shall be clearly and indelibly marked

as follows:

Petroleum Development Oman LLC Version: 2.0 Effective:

May-08

- identification of insulator rod (reference number/specified mechanical load);

- marker’s identification;

- date of manufacture.

4.4. INSULATOR FITTINGS, CONDUCTOR FITTINGS, VIBRATION AND

SPACER DAMPERS

4.4.1 General

Fittings shall comply with BS.3288 and shall be suitable for live line working. Suspension and tension

clamps shall be as light as possible and shall be of aluminium. All clamps shall be designed to avoid any

possibility of deforming the stranded conductors and separating the individual strands. The design of

fittings shall avoid welds. The fittings shall be designed for short circuit currents as per the system

parameters without exceeding a temperature that would damage the conductor or the fitting. Arcing horns

are required to protect the insulator from power arcs. The coupling between fittings shall be such that point

and line contacts are avoided. The design shall avoid sharp corners and projections.

All insulator sets shall be provided with arcing rings as per the drawings.

Bolts and nuts shall be locked in an approved manner. Bolt threads shall be coated with approved grease

immediately before tightening-down at erection.

Split pins for securing attachment of fittings of insulator sets shall be of stainless steel and shall be backed

by washers of approved size and gauge. All insulator strings shall be attached to cross arms by means of


Appendix G18


shackles. Hooks shall not be used. Conductor counterweights shall be provided for suspension insulator

sets supporting jumpers, in order that satisfactory electrical clearances are maintained under all service

conditions.

The steel and cast iron articles shall be galvanized and tested in accordance with the requirements of

BS 729. The weight of coating shall be heavy galvanizing as specified in Appendix T5.

All fittings shall be stored on suitable skids above the ground or at a suitable place to avoid mud

embedment during rain. Dirty fittings shall be cleaned prior to installation.

4.4.2 Type and Uses

The type and arrangement of all insulator and earthwire sets of all insulator and earthwire fittings, suspension

clamps, conductor tension fittings, insulator protective devices, vibration dampers, spacers and spacer dampers

shall be approved. Reference shall be made to Appendices nos. H1, S1, H2 and H3 for details and specific

requirements. Conceptual drawings for insulator sets and OPGW accessories are given in Appendices nos. I4,

I5, I6, I7, I8 & I9 and Appendix O4 respectively.

4.4.3 Experience

The manufacturers shall have at least 10 years experience in the design, manufacturing and testing of the

fittings and dampers.

4.4.4 Design

a) All insulator and conductor fittings shall be designed so as to:

– avoid damage conductor under all service conditions;

– withstand the mechanical loads relevant to the installation-service-maintenance conditions;

– to be free from visible and audible corona discharge and radio interference;

– minimise the number of parts;

– ensure that individual components are secured against becoming loose;

– after compression the compression fittings shall not permit relative movement between the

individual layers of the conductor;

– to be made from materials which have sufficient strength, ductility and environmental resistance

to withstand the static and dynamic loads.

b) Insulator protective fittings including corona shields shall comply with the following requirements:

– shall effectively protect the insulator units and the fittings from damage caused by power arcs;

– shall effectively improve the voltage distribution along the insulator string;

– shall effectively improve the corona performance of the insulator set;

– shall be designed in such a way as not to be subject to breakage fatigue due to wind

induced vibration;

– shall withstand a specified mechanical load.

c) Suspension clamps shall be designed to meet the following requirements:

– to minimise the effect of vibration both on conductor or earthwire and on the clamp;

– to avoid localised pressure or damage to the conductor or earthwire and have sufficient

contact surface to avoid damage by fault current;

– shall be free to pivot in the vertical plane of the conductor/shieldwire and shall have a

minimum range of movement of plus or minus 30°;


Appendix G19


– shall have a slipping capacity between specified minimum and maximum slipping loads;

– the mouth of the suspension clamp shall be rounded and slightly flared, with a minimum radius

of curvature in the vertical plane of 150mm.

d) Dead end joints (full tension) shall have either integral jumper terminals or jumper terminal flaps for

use with bolted jumper palms. They shall be designed to meet the following requirements:

– after installation the initial contact area of the fitting to the conductor or shieldwire does not

raise stresses which may lead to failure under aeolian vibrations;

– to minimise internal voids and to prevent the ingress of moisture during service;

– shall not permit slipping of, or cause damage to, or failure of the complete conductor or any

part thereof at a load less than 95% of the rated ultimate strength of the conductor;

Compression fittings shall be filled with oxide inhibiting compounds prior to the dispatch from the

manufacturers with the ends of the fittings temporarily protected.

e) Vibration Dampers when installed according with the manufacturer's recommendations shall limit

the aeolian vibration levels so that the conductor strain in the surface of the outer wires, determined in

accordance with the CIGRE/IEEE recommendations, based on a software developed by an international

reputed body to be approved, shall not exceed 150 micro-strains peak to peak at the vibration damper

clamp and at the adjacent suspension clamp or dead end. This requirement shall be met for all

frequencies up to f=1480/d Hz, where "d" is the conductor diameter in mm, the manufacturer shall

provide either suitable test results, field test results or calculations to demonstrate to PDO satisfactory

that this requirement is met.

The messenger cable shall have 19 strands and shall be made from Stainless Steel Grade A4.

f) Spacers and Spacer Dampers shall be designed so that to:

– avoid damaging or cause corrosion to the conductor or individual strands under all

service conditions;

– maintain the subconductor spacing at spacer-spacer damper locations within the prescribed

limits under all conditions of service apart from when fault currents are flowing;

– withstand the mechanical loads relevant to the installation, service (including wind induced

conductor movements) and maintenance condition, the design service current including short circuit

effects, the service temperature and environmental effects;

– be free from visible and audible corona discharge and radio interference;

– ensure that individual components are secured against becoming loose in service;

– from materials which have sufficient strength, ductility and environmental resistance to withstand

the static and dynamic loadings;

Spacer dampers shall permit the followings relative movements of subconductors without damage to the

unit or to the conductor:

– longitudinal movement of at least ±25mm;

– vertical movement of at least 20°;

– conical movement of at least 20°;

– horizontal movement perpendicular to the conductor of at least ± the diameter of the conductor.


Type and sample tests shall be undertaken in accordance with this specification and relevant standards.

Type tests specified in Appendices nos. I3, H4, H5 & H6 shall be undertaken on a minimum of three


Appendix G20


samples.

Contract drawings previously approved by PDO shall be available at the time of testing.

The manufacturer Contractor shall give the PDO the requisite period at notice prior to undertaken the tests

and shall submit to PDO a test programme and procedure.

4.5. TESTS ON COMPLETE INSULATOR SETS The following tests shall be carried out at approved independent laboratories, respectively at the

Manufacturer's Works in the presence of Purchaser Inspectors on selected insulator sets used in the

Contract:

- Corona Voltage Test

- Radio Interference Test

- Dry Lightning Impulse Voltage Test

- Wet Power-Frequency Voltage Test.

4.6. AIRCRAFT WARNING SYSTEMS a) Tower Painting

All towers shall be painted in red and white bands according to Annex 14, Aerodromes, Chapter 6,

paragraph 6.2.5 of the International Standards and Recommended Practices issued by the International

Civil Aviation Organization.

The paint system shall be formulated to take into consideration the local environmental conditions. The

paint shall not present a health hazard and shall conform to relevant current health and safety

requirements. The tower steelwork shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to painting.

Reference shall be made as appropriate to BS 5493. Details of the proposed painting system shall be

submitted to the Engineer.

Reference is made also to SP-1101.

b) Aircraft Warning Spheres with diameter of 600mm shall be coloured orange and installed in

the approaches of airstrips or in normal flight paths of low flying aircraft or where helicopter traffic

is present.

The warning spheres shall include all necessary fittings and armour rods.

c) Aircraft Induction Lighting Warning shall be of neon induction type, including insulators, preferably

of composite type, fittings, lamps (one main and one spare per set) and any other item required for

operation on the phase conductors.

The system shall be designed according to ICAO specifications.

d) Aircraft Beacon System (Low Intensity) shall be designed according to ICAO specifications. The

system shall include two beacon lights, cables, solar power photovoltaic panels, batteries of 100Ah,

battery charger, protection against battery complete discharge, photoelectric cell and any other item for

successful signalling of tower peaks.

e) Aircraft Beacon System (Medium Intensity) shall be designed according to ICAO specification for

high voltage line obstacle in proximity of aerodromes. The system shall have the capability of mains

supply 230V, 50Hz or DC voltage supply of 24V.

4.7. ALL DIELECTRIC SHORT SPAN (ADSS) FIBRE OPTIC CABLE

(FOR WOODEN POLE LINES)


Appendix G21


ADSS Fibre Optic Cable and Accessories used on Road Crossing Towers for Wooden Pole lines shall

comply with the requirements of PDO Specification SP1114A.

SP USER-COMMENT FORM

SP User-Comment Form

If you find something that is incorrect, ambiguous or could be better in an SP, write your comments

and suggestions on this form. Send the form to the Document Control Section (DCS). They make a

record of your comment and send the form to the correct CFDH. The form has spaces for your

personal details. This lets DCS or the CFDH ask you about your comments and tell you about the

decision.

SP Details Title Issue Date:

Number:

Page number: Heading Number: Figure Number:

Comments:

Suggestions:

User’s personal details

Name: Ref. Ind: Signature: Date:

Phone:

Document Control Section Actions

Comment Number: Dates CFDH

Ref. Ind: Recd: To CFDH:

CFDH Actions

Recd Date: Decision: Reject:

Accept, revise at next issue:

Accept, issue temporary amendment

Inits: Ref. Ind: Date:

Comments:

Originator Advised: Date: Initial: Document Control Section

Advised:

Date: Initial:


Appendix G22


GENERAL PARAMETERS

Item

No.

Description Details


Wooden

Poles (Road Steel Lattice Towers

Crossing)

1. System Nominal Voltage [kV] 132 132 220

2. System Highest Voltage [kV] 145 145 245

3. System Frequency [Hz] 50 50 50

4. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage [kV] 275 275 395

5. Lighting Impulse Withstand Voltage [kV] 650 650 950

6. System Short Circuit Rating [kA/1 sec] 25 25 25

7. Minimum Creepage Distance for Insulators [mm] 5800 5800 9800

8. Arcing Horn Spacing 1150 1150 1900

9. Number and type of subconductors per phase 1 or 2 ELM 1 or 2 1 or 2 ELM

AAAC ELM or or YEW

YEW AAAC

AAAC

10. Conductor Spacing in Bundle [mm] Along the line

Jumpers

400 450

200 250

11. Number of Phases per Circuit 3 3 3

12. Number of Circuits per Tower 1 1 or 2 1 or 2

13. Number of Shieldwire per tower (7/3.26 ACS or

OPGW equivalent)

- 1 1

14. Number of Shieldwires/OPGW in Downleads - 2 2

15. All Dielectric Short Span (ADSS) Optical Cable 1 - -


Appendix G23

SP-1114B Page G2-1 May 2008

DESIGN CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

Item

No.

Description Details

1.

Design Temperatures

1.1 Minimum temperature of conductors and shieldwire/OPGW/ADSS Cable [°C] 5

1.2 Maximum temperature of conductors [°C] 90

1.3 Maximum temperature of shieldwire/OPGW/ADSS Cable [°C] 80

1.4 Every Day Temperature of conductors and shieldwire/OPGW/ADSS Cable [°C] 35

2.

Design Wind Pressure

2.1 Wind Pressure (Velocity) on conductors on the whole projected area of

conductors and shieldwire/OPGW/ADSS Cable at minimum temperature

[N/m²] ([m/s]) *

971 (40)

2.2 Wind Pressure on one and a half times the projected area of reeled steel

members of one face of the tower [N/m²] *

1600

2.3 Wind Force Coefficient for conductors 1.1

2.4 Wind Force Coefficient for shieldwire/OPGW/ADSS Cable 1.3

2.5 Shape Factor for conductors and shieldwire/OPGW/ADSS Cable 1.0

* Higher wind loadings than the SP 1114A are used because the steel structures are higher

than wooden structures.


Appendix G24


MINIMUM FACTORS OF SAFETY

Item

No.

Description Minimum

Factor of

Safety

1.

Conductors

1.1 Conductors and Shieldwire/OPGW and ADSS Cable at final maximum working tension

(minimum temperature of 5°C and maximum wind pressure of 971 N/m²) based on

ultimate breaking load

2.5

1.2 Conductors and Shieldwire/OPGW and ADSS Cable at still air every day temperature

(35°C) final tension based on ultimate breaking load

5.0

1.3 Dead-end clamps and midspan joints based on conductors or shieldwire ultimate breaking

load

0.95

1.4 Ratio of shieldwire/OPGW sag to conductor sag for basic span at everyday temperature

and still air

0.9

2.

Supports & Foundations

2.1 Intermediate supports and foundations for Intermediate supports under maximum normal

(climatic) working loads.

2.0

2.2 Angle/Section and Dead End supports and their foundations under maximum normal

(climatic) loads

2.5

2.3 All supports and their foundations under maximum unbalanced (security) loads 1.5

2.4 All supports and their foundations under maximum construction & maintenance loads 1.75

2.5 Additional factor of safety applied to all foundations and loading cases above (2.1÷2.4) 1.1

3.

Insulator Strings & Shieldwire Fittings

3.1 Complete insulator string and fittings at maximum working tension based on minimum

failing load

3.0

3.2 Shieldwire/OPGW suspension and tension sets based on minimum failing load 3.0


Appendix G25


ELECTRICAL CLEARANCES AND SPACINGS

1. Electrical Clearances – Live Metal to Earth steelwork 132 kV 220kV

1.1. Minimum clearance for suspension sets, conductor or, pilot jumper

suspension sets deflected from 0° to 20° from the vertical with the

conductor leaving the suspension clamp at any angle – 0° (upwards) and

+15° (downwards) and/or for tension insulator set between -10° and +20°

[mm]

1570 2320

1.2. Minimum clearance for suspension set and/or conductor deflected

between 20° and 45° from the vertical for the conductor leaving the

suspension clamp at any angle between 0° and +15° [mm]

1320 2070

1.3. Jumper loop in still air [mm] 1570 2320

1.4. Jumper loop deflected at 25° from the vertical [mm] 1320 2070

2. Spatial Distances

2.1. Minimum shielding angle of the earthwire (still air) 30° 30°

2.2. Maximum swing of shieldwire suspension set (from vertical) 85° 85°

2.3. Minimum vertical spacing between phase conductors and earthwire (at

tower) [m]

5.0 6.0

2.4. Minimum clearance in still air at the assumed maximum temperature

between adjacent downleads [m]

2.5 3.2

2.5. Minimum clearance between ADSS Fiber Optic Cable and Live

Conductor [m]

1.2 -

2.6. Phase to phase clearance for downleads [m] 2.5 3.0

3. Clearances to ground and other features * [m]

3.1. Normal ground 6.7 7.0

3.2. Roads with level surface 16.0 16.0

3.3. Roads with uneven surface and roads with slope 17.2 17.2

3.4. Buildings, structures, walls, communication aerials 4.6 5.2

3.5. Trees 3.7 4.3

3.6. Power lines up to 33kV 2.7 3.3

3.7. Communication Lines 4.0 4.6

3.8. Power line supports on which a man may stand 3.7 4.3

3.9. Horizontal distance between power lines 20.0 20.0

3.10. Clearance to other installations As per SP 1127

* An additional 0.6m vertical clearance shall be added to compensate the conductor bending

down.


Appendix T1

CLASSES OF TOWERS AND DESIGNATION OF TOWER TYPES

SP-1114B Page T1-1 May 2008

1. 132 kV Towers (1)

1.1. Single Circuit Towers (S) with Single ELM AAAC per Phase (E1)

Item Designation Line Angle Description Type of Insulator Set

1 1SS/E1 0°-2° Angle of Deviation Intermediate Suspension

2 1ST2/E1 0°-20° Angle of Deviation Angle/Section Heavy Suspension

Tension Heavy Susp.

3 1ST6/E1 20°-60° Angle of Deviation Angle Tension

4 1SD9/E1 60°-90° Angle of Deviation

0°-45° Entry Angle

Angle Dead End/Road Crossing

Tension

1.2. Single Circuit Towers (S) with Twin ELM AAAC per Phase (E2)


1 1SS/E2 0°-2° Angle of Deviation Intermediate Suspension

2 1ST2/E2 0°-20° Angle of Deviation Angle/Section Heavy Suspension

Tension Heavy Suspension

3 1ST6/E2 20°-60° Angle of Deviation Angle Tension

4 1SD9/E2 60°-90° Angle of Deviation



Tension

1.3. Double Circuit Towers (D) with Single ELM AAAC per Phase (E1)


1 1DS/E1 0°-2° Angle of Deviation Intermediate Suspension

2 1DT2/E1 0°-20° Angle of Deviation Angle/Section Heavy Suspension


3 1DT6/E1 20°-60° Angle of Deviation Angle Tension

4 1DD9/E1 60°-90° Angle of Deviation 0°-45° Entry Angle


Tension

1.4. Double Circuit Towers (D) with Twin ELM AAAC per Phase (E2)


1 1DS/E2 0°-2° Angle of Deviation Intermediate Suspension

2 1DT2/E2 0°-20° Angle of Deviation Angle/Section Heavy Suspension


3 1DT6/E2 20°-60° Angle of Deviation Angle Tension

4 1DD9/E2 60°-90° Angle of Deviation 0°-45° Entry Angle


Tension

1.5. Single Circuit Towers (S) with Single YEW AAAC per Phase (Y1)


1 1SS/Y1 0°-2° Angle of Deviation Intermediate Suspension

2 1ST2/Y1 0°-20° Angle of Deviation Angle/Section Heavy Suspension


3 1ST6/Y1 20°-60° Angle of Deviation Angle Tension

4 1SD9/Y1 60°-90° Angle of Deviation 0°-45° Entry Angle


Tension



Appendix T1


1.6. Single Circuit Towers (S) with Twin YEW AAAC per Phase (Y2)






4 1SD9/Y2 60°-90° Angle of Deviation



Tension

1.7. Double Circuit Towers (D) with Single YEW AAAC per Phase (Y1)


1 1DS/Y1 0°-2° Angle of Deviation Intermediate Suspension

2 1DT2/Y1 0°-20° Angle of Deviation Angle/Section Heavy Suspension


3 1DT6/Y1 20°-60° Angle of Deviation Angle Tension

4 1DD9/Y1 60°-90° Angle of Deviation 0°-45° Entry Angle


Tension

1.8. Double Circuit Towers (D) with Twin YEW AAAC per Phase (Y2)






4 1DD9/Y2 60°-90° Angle of Deviation



Tension

2. 220 kV Towers (2)

2.1. Single Circuit Towers (S) with Single YEW AAAC per Phase (Y1)







5 2SD9/Y1 60°-90° Angle of Deviation 0°-45° Entry Angle


Tension

2.2. Single Circuit Towers (S) with Twin YEW AAAC per Phase (Y2)







5 2SD9/Y2 60°-90° Angle of Deviation



Tension



Appendix T1


2.3. Double Circuit Towers (D) with Single YEW AAAC per Phase (Y1)







5 2DD9/Y1 60°-90° Angle of Deviation 0°-45° Entry Angle


Tension

2.4. Double Circuit Towers (D) with Twin YEW AAAC per Phase (Y2)







5 2DD9/Y2 60°-90° Angle of Deviation



Tension

3. 132 kV Towers (1) for Road Crossing (RC) used for Wooden Pole lines

3.1. Single Circuit Towers with Single ELM AAAC per Phase (E1) with Horizontal

(H) Conductor Formation


1 1RCH/E1 0° Entry Angle 0°-45° Slack Span Angle

Dead End/Road Crossing Tension

3.2. Single Circuit Towers with Twin ELM AAAC per Phase (E2) with Horizontal

(H) Conductor Formation


1 1RCH/E2 0° Entry Angle

0°-45° Slack Span Angle

Dead End/Road Crossing Tension



APPENDIX T2: TOWER CONCEPTUAL DRAWINGS

Version 2 Specification of Design of 132 & 220 kV Overhead Power Lines on Lattice Steel Towers

APPENDIX T2

Tower Conceptual Drawings

NOTE: Tower dimensions

SP-11148

and shapes are aproximate and shall be detenmined according to actual loadings and insulator strings actual dimensions

MAY 2008 Page T2/1

I

I I

J

I

.. j

! - I

132 kV Single Circuit Intermediate Tower Single ELM AAAC per Phase - Type 1SS/E1

Peak Details

I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I \'--.. ..,_ ...

.. .... ... /,I I I I

lf--::>lo

I

I I I I I

'Sl ±2m I• tor stmdgrd Ignr Ext hy 9m

v tJm 1M! tor Slg!dqrd Taw Ext by am


APPENDIX T2



SP-11148


MAY 2008 Page T2/2

132 kV Single Circuit Angle/Section/Heavy Suspension Tower

Single ELM MAC per Phase - Type 1ST2/E1

Peak Detail (Heavy Suspension Chock)

I I I I I I I I

A

Section A-A (Typical)

J

I

.. "'

V ±2m I• fir stmdgrd Tgw Fxf !Jt 9m

V Qn I., fir stgnckrd l!llft( Ext h!r 9m

J

I


APPENDIX T2


132 kV Single Circuit Angle Tower

Single ELM MAC per Phase - Type 1ST6/E1

I I I I I I I I I

A

I

\ I I I I I I

\ I I I I I I

\ I I I I I I

\ I I

"-lllpiiDIIIU.

I I

\ I

Section A-A

(Typical)

V ±2m I• for stgp:rd I!Wf Ext !w 9m

v ±3m ,., fw :lgndgn! Tgw fxt IN '"'

NOTE: Tower dimensions and shapes are aproximate and shall be detennined according to actual loadings and insulator strings actual dimensions

SP-11148 Page T2/3 MAY 2008

I I


APPENDIX T2


132 kV Single Circuit Dead End Tower

Single ELM f.AAC per Phase - Type 1SD9/E1

Line Side

II I I I I

/I I I

I I

..

Substation Side

A

J .. il

J

I

.. J

!..

v *"" I• fw Stcp!gn! Tcwr Fxt ter Pm

V ±:a Ltp fw stgnd!lll IW" Ext tr 9m

NOTE: Tower dimensions and shapes are aproximate and shall be detenmined according to actual loadings and insulator strings actual dimensions

SP-11148 Page T2/4 MAY 2008

I

I

I

I


APPENDIX T2


132 kV Single Circuit Intermediate Tower

Twin ELM AMC per Phase - Type 1SS/E2

Peak Details

II

/I I I I I

I

J I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

..-... I


I

..-

--1-J.-m i

/,I I I I lf-----,1,

I

I

\'--. I I I I

...

V ±2m !111 fer stanckrd 1111!11' Ext !w 9m

V ±3m I• fer standm;l lgnr Ext !w 9m


SP-11148 Page T2/5

MAY 2008


APPENDIX T2



Twin ELM AAAC per Phase - Type 1ST2/E2

Peak Detail (Heavy Suspension Check)

I I I I I I I I

A

Section A-A

(Typical

..

v t2m LJ!Il fpr stmdgrd TO!!J fxt !w 9m

V tJm I• fir Sbplgrd Tgw FJt by 9m


SP-11148 Page T2/6 MAY 2008

..

..


APPENDIX T2



Twin ELM MAC per Phase - Type 1ST6/E2

II

I"I

/ I

I I I I I I

Jl

J.._ u

I I I

A

Section A-A

(Typical)

V f2m ltq f« stmdqnl Tgnr ExL by Pm

V +Jm I 011 tgr 5tmkrd T!lltJ f¥t !w 9m


SP-11148 Page T2/7 MAY 2008

I I

I


APPENDIX T2



Twin ELM fl.MC per Phase - Type 1SD9/E2

Line Side

II I I

/I I I I I I I

Substation Side

A

I I I I I I I I I

\ I I I I I I I

\ I

.. I I I

v +2m t. fg' stmd!rd Ignr £xL 1w am

V U1l ltp fir stmlqrd I!W Ext !w 8m


SP-11148 Page T2/8 MAY 2008

J

I I

I I

I I

I I I I

I § I

..


APPENDIX T2

Tower Conceptual Drawings 132 kV Double Circuit Intermediate Tower

Single ELM AMC per Phase - Type 1DS/E1

Peak Details

J

"' il I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I

B I; I I

I I I I I I I

I

";"h I I


I

I I..

I I I I I I I I I I I I I

SlltpBaltiiU./1 \'--. I I I I I I I I

..-...

sz-Zm 11111 fill: ...mm Ia

NOTE:

V ±2m I• tpr stpndtrd Itwr Ext hy $m

sz t!tn I• fir stgndgd IC!I!!I' fxt !w Pro

Tower dimensions and shapes are aproximate and shall be detennined according to actual loadings and insulator strings actual dimensions

SP-11148 Page T2/9 MAY 2008

I

I "

I "


APPENDIX T2 Tower Conceptual Drawings

132

Angle/Section Tower Check

kV Double Circuit Angle/Section/Heavy Suspension Tower

Single ELM AAAC per Phase - Type 1DT2/E1 Heavy Suspension

Tower Check

/'II

I I

I I I I I I I I

J

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I


Section A-A

(Typical)

I I I I I I I

\'. ... IIDIIIIU.

I I I I I

v f2m Lte fpr Sbpkrd Tonr Ell bv Sm

NOTE: v Pn LM ftr stand!IJ! Tqnr &L by flm

Tower dimensions and shapes are aproximate and shall be detenmined according to actual loadings and insulator strings actual dimensions

SP-11148 Page T2/10 MAY 2008

"


APPENDIX T2


132 kV Double Circuit Angle Tower

Single ELM MAC per Phase - Type 1DT6/E1

II

I I

I I

I I I I I I I I I

J Section A-A

I (Typical)

..

NOTE:

v f2m LM fg' stcpkr4 Tonr &t bw Sm

v Qn 1111 fpr standgrd I!IIM' Ext IN Brn


SP-11148 Page T2/11 MAY 2008

I

I

I


APPENDIX T2


132 kV Double Circuit Dead End Tower

Single ELM MAC per Phase - Type 1DD9/E1

Une Side

Substation Side

J I I I I

\ \ Section A-A I (Typical) I I I I I

\ I I I I I I I I I

\

.. I I I

• +2m I• fir Sfmdm! Jew rn 1w Brn

•±:b I• f« stmdpnl I!W fit IN Sm


SP-11148 Page T2/12 MAY 2008

I


APPENDIX T2


Twin ELM AAAC per Phase - Type 1DS/E2

Peak Details

NOTE:

.. i

!.. "'

o.l!

i l!

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

\'-.. I I I I

..-...

'SZ ±2m I• fer Sbplgrd Ten FJt !w Bm

'Sl ±3m I• tor stmdgrd Trw Ext lw Bm


SP-11148

Page T2/13 MAY 2008

i


APPENDIX T2


132 kV Double Circuit Angle/Section/Heavy Suspension Tower

Twin ELM MAC per Phase - Type 1DT2/E2


;'•

Heavy Suspension Tower Check

Peak Detail

(Heavy Suspension Check)

I I

J.._ u

J

il J

Section A-A

d! (Typical)

I!

";"h

NOTE:

V f2m La! fw Sfpnd!IJI Igm &t IN Bm

v an Lll!! fir stmdqnt 1.,. Ext 1w 9rn


SP-11148

Page T2/14 MAY 2008


APPENDIX T2



Twin ELM MAC per Phase - Type 1DT6/E2

I I I I I I I I I

J Section A-A

I (Typical)

"

v tzm ltg fgr 5tpndgrd TD!!J &L by 9m

NOTE: V tJm I• fir ScpkrJI Tonr fxt !w Sm


SP-11148

Page T2/15

MAY 2008


APPENDIX T2

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page T2/16

"



Twin ELM f.AAC per Phase - Type 1DD9/E2

Line Side

Substation Side

J

il J

II Section A-A

B (Typical)

7,h.

I

"

V ±2m I• f« stmpd Ignr fit tJw Sm

sz ±:h I• fer Shpml r_. fit 1er 1m



APPENDIX T2



SP-11148


MAY 2008 Page T2/17

I t-:

J ·I

":h p

j

/, \'--.. ..,_ ...

..


Single YEW AAAC per Phase - Type 1SS/Y1

Peak Details

I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

!.. ....-...

I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I

:sz -2m Lag fm: stmdnol I.:


:sz tJm 1M! tor Slg!dqrd Taw Ext by am


APPENDIX T2



SP-11148


MAY 2008 Page T2/18


Single YEW MAC per Phase - Type 1ST2/Y1


I I I I I I I I

A


J

I

.. "'



J

I


APPENDIX T2




I I I I I I I I I

A

I

\ I I I I I I

\ I I I I I I

\ I I I I I I

\ I I

"-lllpiiDIIIU.

I I

\ I

Section A-A

(Typical)




SP-11148 Page T2/19 MAY 2008

J

I

.. J

I


APPENDIX T2



Single YEW AMC per Phase - Type 1SD9/Y1

Line Side

Substation Side

A

I I I I I I I

\ Section A-A

\ (Typical) I I I I I

\ \ I I I I I I I I

!.. I I I

v *"" I• fw Stcp!gn! Tcwr Fxt ter Pm

V ±:a Ltp fw stgnd!lll IW" Ext tr 9m


SP-11148 Page T2/20 MAY 2008

I

I

I

I


APPENDIX T2



Twin YEW AAAC per Phase - Type 1SS/Y2

Peak Details

II

/I I I I I

I

J I


..-... I


I

..-

--1-J.-m i

/,I I I I lf-----,1,

I

I

\'--. I I I I

...




SP-11148 Page T2/21

MAY 2008


APPENDIX T2



Twin YC!N AAAC per Phase - Type 1ST2/Y2

Peak Detail


I I I I I I I I

A

Section A-A

(Typical

..




SP-11148 Page T2/22 MAY 2008

..

..


APPENDIX T2



Twin YEW MAC per Phase - Type 1ST6/Y2

II

I"I

/ I

I I I I I I

Jl

J.._ u

I I I

A

Section A-A

(Typical)




SP-11148 Page T2/23 MAY 2008

I I

I

I

..


APPENDIX T2



Twin YtJ/ MAC per Phase - Type 1SD9/Y2

Line Side

II I I

/I I I I I I I

Substation Side

A

Section A-A I (Typical) I I Substation Side I

\ I I I I I I I I I

\ I I I I I I I

\ I

Line Side

I I I

v +2m t. fg' stmd!rd Ignr £xL 1w am

V U1l ltp fir stmlqrd I!W Ext !w 8m


SP-11148 Page T2/24 MAY 2008

u J

I


APPENDIX T2


132 kV Double Circuit Intermediate Tower

Single YEW N>AC per Phase - Type 1DS/Y1

Peak Details

I s_


..

NOTE:

......u. I I I I I

'SZ ±2m I• fir SgMkrd IQM" Fyt lw !1m

'SZ Qn I• fer SgMkrd 1!111( fvt lw Brn


SP-11148 Page T2/25

MAY 2008

\'.. ... ..

I


APPENDIX T2


132


kV Double Circuit Angle/Section/Heavy Suspension Tower

Single YEW MAC per Phase - Type 1DT2/Y1 Heavy Suspension

Tower Check

Peak Detail


Section A-A I

(Typical) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I

I I I I I

V ±2m I• fir SfgK!grd Iqw f¥t !w 9m

NOTE: v f3m ltg fpr Sbpkrd TOll[ Exl bw Sm


SP-11148 Page T2/26 MAY 2008

"


APPENDIX T2



Single YEW MAC per Phase - Type 1DT6/Y1

II

I I

I I

I I I I I I I I I

J Section A-A

I (Typical)

..

NOTE:




SP-11148 Page T2/27 MAY 2008

/

I I

I

I

I


APPENDIX T2



Single YEW MAC per Phase - Type 1DD9/Y1

Une Side

II I I

/I I I I I I I

/ // I

I

Substation Side

J I I I I

\ \ Section A-A I (Typical) I I I I I

\ I I I I I I I I I

\

.. I I I

• +2m I• fir Sfmdm! Jew rn 1w Brn

•±:b I• f« stmdpnl I!W fit IN Sm


SP-11148 Page T2/28 MAY 2008

I I


APPENDIX T2


132 kV Double Circuit Intermediate Tower

Twin YEW AAAC per Phase - Type 1DS/Y2

Peak Details

/1'I I I

I ,_ ml

J

I

NOTE:

.. J

j..

I I I 1

h'"""''-11 \ I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I 1 I I I 1 I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

-1-J._Jg!. I \ I I I I

..... an /1 911p1111111m

I I I I I I I I lf----,1,;::::---\'1

v f2m Ltg fgr stpnd1111 Ten Ext hv Sm

V tJm LJ!!! fqr Shpbd liM' £zl by Sm


SP-11148 Page T2/29

MAY 2008

I


APPENDIX T2



Twin YEW MAC per Phase - Type 1DT2/Y2




J

Section A-A

Typical)

..

V t2m Ltg fir standrrJ! Tgnr Ext. by Pm

NOTE: V ±)a I• fer stmdprd l!lllf fyt !Jt 9m


SP-11148 Page T2/30 MAY 2008


APPENDIX T2


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page T2/31



I I I I I I I I I

J Section A-A

I (Typical)

"





APPENDIX T2


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page T2/32

"


Twin YEW Af.AC per Phase - Type 1DD9/Y2

Line Side

Substation Side

J

il J I Section A-A II:

7,h.

(Typical)

Substation Side

I I "

Line Side

V ±2m I• f« stmpd Ignr fit tJw Sm

sz ±:h I• fer Shpml r_. fit 1er 1m

NOTE: Tower dimensions ond shapes are aproximate ond shall be detenmined according to actual loadings ond insulator strings actual dimensions


APPENDIX T2



SP-11148


Dec2016 Page T2/33

J · I t-:

j

/, \'--.. ..,_ ...

Pi

..


Single YEW AAAC per Phase - Type 2SS/Y1

Peak Details

I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I .. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

!.. ....-...

I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I

:sz -2m Lag fm: stmdnol I.:


:sz tJm 1M! tor Slg!dqrd Taw Ext by am


APPENDIX T2



SP-11148


Dec2016 Page T2/34


Single YEW AAAC per Phase - Type 2ST1/Y1


I I I I I I I I

A


J

I

.. "'



J

I

I


APPENDIX T2




A II I I I I

/I

I I I I I I I I I

A

I Section A-A \

(Typical) I I I I I

\ I I I I I I

\ I I I I I I

\ I I

"-lllpiiDIIIU.

I I

\ I




SP-11148

Page T2/35 MAY 2008

"


APPENDIX T2



Single YEW AAAC per Phase - Type 2ST6/Y1

If

I I

/ I

I I I I I I I I I

A

Section A-A

(Typical)

J

I

..

NOTE:

V t2m I• fw stgndqrd Tqwar fxt !w 9rn

V ±3m I '9 fir stmdcrd TOll[ fxt tw 9m


SP-1114B Page T2/36 MAY 2008

I


APPENDIX T2


22D kV Single Circuit Dead End Tower

Single YEW flMC per Phase - Type 2SD9/Y1

Line Side

II I I I I

/I / I I I

Substation Side

I

I I I

A

J Section A-A

(Typical)

..

v ±2m ltp tpr stpnd!rd r_. FxL 1w ""

V Qn I• fer stmdgrd 1!11!( &t hy 8m


SP-1114B Page T2/37

MAY 2008


APPENDIX T2



Twin YEW AAAC per Phase - Type 2SS/Y2

Peak Details

II

/I I I I I

I

J

I

..-...


i I

/,I I I I lf-----,1,


I I I

\'--. I I I I

..-...




SP-11148 Page T2/38

MAY 2008


APPENDIX T2



Twin YC!N MAC per Phase - Type 2ST1/Y2


A

Section A-A

(Typical

..




SP-11148 Page T2/39 MAY 2008

..

..

I I


APPENDIX T2




II

I"I

/ I

I I I I I I

Jl I

A

J.._ u

Section A-A

(Typical)




SP-11148 Page T2/40 MAY 2008

I

" I

',h

"

I

J I

" I I

I

s


APPENDIX T2

Tower Conceptual Drawings 220 kV Single Circuit Angle Tawer


I i.!i I

.B' I

.s I

I I I I I

A

I

il

I I I Section A-A I (Typical)

I I

1! I

-§

Pi I

oil I I I I I

.. ;I I

"'.I! I

I I I I

.. I

-...

I I I

! I ... I I

I I

:sz -2m Lla fm: Slallllrlll Imr:

NOTE:

V t2m I.,fir standcrd Tgnr Ext by 9m

v +:«n Ltg fir standgrd Tower ExL 1rt Pm


SP-11148 Page T2/41

MAY 2008

I I


APPENDIX T2


22D kV Single Circuit Dead End Tower

Twin YtJ/ flAAC per Phase - Type 2SD9/Y2

I I I /1 I I I I I I

I I I I I

Une Side

Substation Side

A

Section A-A IT

(Typical)

Substation Side

Line Side

V ±2m lp fir stand!IJI I!!W' ElL bJ Pm

sz tJm ,., fir stgprd Trw fxt btr Sm


SP-11148 Page T2/42 MAY 2008

'i "

"

I I I I I I

.. J I I

I I I I

I I


APPENDIX T2


Single YEW AAAC per Phase - Type 2DS/Y1

Peak Details

J

"' il I I

J I I

I I I I I I

· I I


I' Jl .. I I


I I I I I I I I I I I I

..

,.._ ...

llllltu./1 \'--. I I I I I I I I I I

:sz -2m Lag fm:: staod!D IQIII

V ±2m I• f« stond!IJ! IQ!« fit hv 9m

NOTE: v t)n LA9 f« stondrrd TQ!Of Ext, by 1m


SP-11148 Page T2/43 MAY 2008

1:

Version 2

22D


Specification of Design of 132 & 220 kV Overhead Power Lines on Lattice Steel Towers

APPENDIX T2

Tower Conceptual Drawings kV Double Circuit Angle/Section/Heavy Suspension Tower

Single YEW MAC per Phase - Type 2DT1/Y1 Heavy Suspension

Tower Check


I I I I I I I I

J

il

J.._ u

J

i Section A-A

dl Typical)

1 I ll's

.. i

!.. "'

v f2m I• fir Sbplgrd Ten Ext 1w Pro

NOTE: v Qn ,., f« stonckrd 1!111[ Ext hy 9m

Tower dimensions ond shapes are aproximate ond shall be detenmined according to actual loadings ond insulator strings actual dimensions

SP-11148 Page T2/44

MAY 2008

"

I


APPENDIX T2




II

I I

I I

I I I I I I I I I

J Section A-A

Typical

..

NOTE:




SP-11148

Page T2/45

MAY 2008

I


APPENDIX T2


22D kV Double Circuit Angle Tower


II I I I I

/ I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

J Section A-A

(Typical)

.. J I..

"'

v ±2m I• tgr stanckrd Trn Ext IN am

NOTE: v Qn LM tgr stmdgrd Igwar &t by Pm


SP-11148

Page T2/46

MAY 2008

I

I I

I

I


APPENDIX T2



Single YEW MAC per Phase - Type 2DD9/Y1

II I I

/I I I I I I I

I ,/'

I

I

Line Side

Substation Side

J I I I I

\ \ I I I I I I I

\ I I I I I I I I I

\

I I

::-----\1

Section A-A

(Typical)

•±2m I• fsr strplpnl ..Ext IN Sm

• ±3m I• tw !lpnckrd Itw fJt !!!I 9m


SP-11148 Page T2/47 MAY 2008

I


APPENDIX T2


Twin YEW f!AAC per Phase - Type 2DS/Y2

Peak Details

J

I

.. J J..


\'-.. I I I I

..-...

'SZ f2m Leg fir stmdgrd Tonr Ext by 9m

NOTE: 'SZ f3m Lcg mr stmdgrd Iqnr Ext by Am


SP-11148 Page T2/48 MAY 2008

"

I








j


I I..

v f2m lte fir Stgm!qrd IQ!M' Ell !w Pro

NOTE: v ±:m ,., fw Stgnd!rd Iqar fxt hv 9m


SP-11148 Page T2/49 MAY 2008


APPENDIX T2


22D kV Double Circuit Angle Tower


I I I I I I I I I

J

I Section A-A

(Typical)

"




SP-11148

Page T2/50

MAY 2008

:


APPENDIX T2




II

I/! I

I I I I

/

I I I I I I I I I

Section A-A

(Typical)

..

i l

! '&

'SZ ±2m I• f« stmdrrJI Tonr FU !w 9m

NOTE:

V tJm ltq fgr Slpndgrd IQW' Exl b!r Pm


SP-11148 Page T2/51 MAY 2008

I I


APPENDIX T2



Twin YEW MAC per Phase - Type 2DD9/Y2

Line Side

II II

/I I I I I I I

Substation Side

J.._ Ji

J

I

Section A-A

(Typical)

Substation Side

Line Side

V fZm I• fir stmdqrd lgnr Ext by Bm


SP-11148 Page T2/52 MAY 2008


APPENDIX T2 Tower Conceptual Drawings Road Crossing Tower for Wooden Pole Lines .... --

4800

Slack Span

Crossing Span

132kV Single Circuit Tower, Horizontal Conductor Formation; Single ELM AAAC per Phase

..,._,...,. Tower Twe 1RCH/E1 4800 Side Side

2250 2250

A

stop Bolts

Section •A•

Crossing Span Side

..

Live End o..lco

NOTE:

Slack Span DMIUan An e

Slack Span Side

Tower dimensions and shapes are aproximate and shall be determined according to actual loadings and insulator strings actual dimensions

SP-11148

Page T2/53

MAY 2008

J



Road Crossing Tower for Wooden Pole Lines 132kV Single Circuit Tower, Horizontal Conductor Formation; Twin ELM AAAC per Phase

Tower Twe 1RCH/E2

5250

3JOO

2000 2000

Slack Span Side

Crossing Span Side

§! 1'0 I l

Step Bolts Lile ;o.i.l -; "

]

step

t ! i

j l

..

NOTE:

Crossing Span Side

Slack Span Slde

Tower dimensions ond shapes are aproximate and shall be determined according to actual loadings ond insulator strings actual dimensions

SP-11148

Page T2/54

MAY 2008


Appendix T3

SPAN CRITERIA Item

132 kV Towers, Single and

Double Circuit

220 kV Towers,

Single and

Double Circuit,

Single and Twin

YEW AAAC per

Phase

132kV Road Crossing Towers for

Wooden Pole lines, Single Circuit,

Horizontal Conductor Formation,

Single and Twin ELM AAAC per

Phase

Single and Twin

ELM AAAC per

Phase

Single and Twin

YEW AAAC per

Phase Crossing

Span

Slack

Span

1 Climatic Loadings and Security

300

350

390

200

100

Loadings (intact wires only)

1.1 Basic Span (all towers)

1.2 Maximum Span (all towers) (*) (*) (*) 200 100

1.3 Intermediate Towers a) Wind Span [m] 350 410 450 - -

b) Maximum Weight Span [m] 800 800 800 - -

c) Minimum Weight Span [m] 180 210 270 - -

1.4 Angle Tension Towers a) Wind Span [m] 350 410 450 - -


c) Minimum Weight Span [m] -300 -300 -300 - -

1.5 Section Towers a) Wind Span [m] 350 410 450 - -



1.6 Dead End & Road Crossing Towers a) Wind Span [m] 265 310 340 125 50

b) Maximum Weight Span [m] 1150 1150 1150 700 250

c) Minimum Weight Span [m] -300 -300 -300 -150 0

2 Security Loadings (broken wires only)

2.1 Intermediate Towers a) Wind Span [m] 265 310 340 - -


c) Minimum Weight Span [m] 110 125 165 - -

2.2 Angle Tension Towers a) Wind Span [m] 265 310 340 - -



2.3 Section Towers a) Wind Span [m] 265 310 340 - -



2.4 Dead End & Road Crossing Towers a) Wind Span [m] 0 0 0 0 0

b) Maximum Weight Span [m] 0 0 0 0 0

c) Minimum Weight Span [m] 0 0 0 0 0

3 Security Loadings (longitudinal

cascade)

3.1 Wind Span 0 0 0 0 0

3.2 Weight Span a) Intermediate Towers 800 800 800 - -

b) Angle Tension Towers 1150 1150 1150 - -

c) Section Towers 1250 1250 1250 - -

d) Dead End & Road Crossing Towers 1150 1150 1150 700 250

(*) To be determined by the Contractor as per final tower top geometry according to DIN VDE 0210 or other approved

standard taking into account the actual tower top geometry (vertical and horizontal conductor spacings).


Other Notations:

a – Wind Span (Appendix T3)

PC, PE – Conductor, Shieldwire Tension (Appendix T7)

aWM, aWm – Maximum, Minimum Weight Span (Appendix T3) Sf – Safety Factor (Appendix G3)

CO

ND

UC

TO

R L

OA

DIN

GS

(for

each a

ttachm

ent

poin

t specifie

d f

or

each t

ype o

f lo

adin

g)

Version 2 Specification of Design of 132 & 220kV Overhead Power Lines on Lattice STEEL TOWERS

Appendix T4

Sample of Tower Ultimate Loading Computation 220 kV Double Circuit Towers; Twin YEW AAAC per Phase, Tower Type 2DS/Y2

Normal (Climatic) Loadings

Sf=2.0

Unbalanced (Security) Loadings Sf=1.5

Broken Wire Conditions (Breakage of one phase or the shieldwire)

Cascade Conditions

Construction & Maintenance Loadings Sf=1.75

Intact Wires Broken Wires All Wires Broken

a= 450m a= 450m a= 340m a= 0m

aWM=800m aWm=270m aWM=800m aWm=270m aWM=600m aWm=165m aWM= 800m

PC=5370daN PE=2220daN PC=5370daN PE=2220daN PC=5370daN PE=2220daN PC=2680daN PE=880daN n= 2 n= 2 n= 1 n= 1

Calculation according to

page 2 of this Appendix and apply to all attachment

points step by step

Longitudinal Loadings

Earthwire: LE = PE × Sf - - 3330 1320 110

L - [daN] Phase Conductor: LC = 0.7×nC ×PC ×Sf

Shieldwire

- - 11277 5628 884

Maximum Weight

VEM = aWM × gE × Sf × 0.98 616 459 344 459 1045

Vertical Loadings

VM Phase Conductor VCM=(nC ×aWM×gC + Wi) ×Sf ×0.98 Shieldwire

4254 3191 2415 3191 8410

V - [daN] Minimum

Weight

VEm = aWm × gE × 0.98

Phase Conductor

104 104 63 - -

Vm V =(n ×a ×g + W) ×0.98 757 757 485 - - Cm C Wm C i

Due to Angle

TA = n × PE × sin α / 2 × Sf

Shieldwire Due to Wind

155 116 58 23 72

Transverse Loadings T - [daN]

TE

Phase

TW = a × v E × Sf

Total TE = TA + TW

Due to Angle

TA = n × n C × PC × sin α / 2 × Sf

1116 834 630 - -

1271 950 688 23 72

750 562 281 140 573

Conductor Due to Wind

TC TW = (n C × a × v C + Vi ) × Sf

Total TC = TA + TW

5565 4174 3172 - -

6315 4736 3453 140 573

WIND ON STRUCTURE Wind pressure on 1½ times the projected

(TRANSVERSE) areas of rolled steel members of one longitudinal face of the tower [daN/m²]

320 240 - -

Conductor/Shieldwire Unit Conductor/Shieldwire Unit Weight of Suspension Wind on Suspension Number of subconductors Maximum Line Angle Weight (Appendix T7) Wind Force(Appendix T7) Insulator Set (Appendix. S1) Insulator Set per phase (Appendix T1) Deviation (Appendix T1)

Conductor and Insulator Design Data gC=1.319kg/m vC=3.036daN/m Wi=60kg Vi=50daN nC=2 α=2°

Shieldwire Design Data gE=0.390kg/m vE=1.235daN/m - - - α=2°

SP-1114B Page T4-1 MAY 2008

Version 2 Specification of Design of 132 & 220 kV Overhead Power Lines on Lattice STEEL TOWERS

Appendix T4

SAMPLE OF TOWER ULTIMATE LOADING COMPUTATION

220 kV Double Circuit Towers; Twin YEW AAAC per Phase, Tower Type 2DS/Y2

Loads Derived from Conductor Stringing for Suspension Tower (Working)

LOAD

DIRECTION

STEP 1 - SAGGING STEP 2 - ANCHORED TOWER

CALCULATION

FORMULA

Loadings

[daN]

CALCULATION

FORMULA

Loadings

[daN]

Earthwire

Ts PE x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x sin α 1 PE x (1+ cos γ/cos δ) x sin α 41

Vs PE x (tan δ + sin γ / cos δ) 597 PE x (tan δ + sin γ / cos δ) 597

Ls PE x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x cos α 63 PE x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x cos α 63

Phase

Ts nC x PC x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x sin α 8 nC x PC x (1+ cos γ/cos δ) x sin α 327

Vs nC x PC x (tan δ + sin γ / cos δ) 4806 nC x PC x (tan δ + sin γ / cos δ) 4806

Conductors Ls nC x PC x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x cos α 505 nC x PC x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x cos α 505

Where

PE = 1325 daN

PC = 5330 daN

δ = 7°

γ = 19°

NOTE:

- Conductor sagging at suspension tower shall be done with

pulling device located at a distance of minimum 3 times the

height of the respective attachment point.

- The loadings, which result from stringing at a suspension

tower, cover the loadings which might appear during

maintenance works.



Appendix T4 SAMPLE OF TOWER ULTIMATE LOADING COMPUTATION

Road Crossing Tower for Wooden Pole Lines


CO

ND

UC

TO

R L

OA

DIN

GS

(for

each a

ttachm

ent

poin

t specifie

d f

or

each t

ype o

f lo

adin

g)

132kV Single Circuit Tower; Single ELM AAAC per Phase, Tower Type 1RCH/E1 CROSSING SIDE - α = 0° SLACK SPAN SIDE - α = 45°


Sf=2.5


Broken Wire Conditions (Breakage of up to two adjacent phases or the ADSS Cable)

Intact Wires Broken Wires

Construction & Maintenance Loadings

Sf=1.75 Calculation according


Sf=2.5 a=50m

Loadings for the Case of Unbalanced

Loadings on Crossing Side;Sf=1.5

Intact Wires

a= 125m a= 125m a= 0m

aWM=700m aWm=-150m aWM=700m aWm=-150m aWM=0m aWm=0m

PC=2364daN PE=1500daN PC=2364daN PE=1500daN PC=0daN PE=0daN n= 2 n= 2 n= 0

to page 3 of this Appendix and apply to all attachment points

step by step

aWM=250m aWm=0m

PC=900daN PE=500daN

a=50m aWM=250m; aWm=0m

PC=900daN PE=500daN


ADSS Cable: L E = PE × cos α × Sf 3750 2250 0 2567 -884 -530

L - [daN] Phase Conductor: LC = n c × Pc × cos α × Sf

ADSS Cable

5910 3546 0 3666 -1414 -849

Maximum Weight

VEM = aWM × gE × Sf × 0.98

Phase Conductor

309 185 0 1157 110 66

Vertical VM V =(n ×a ×g +W +W )×S ×0.98 1436 862 0 1652 527 316

CM C WM C IT IP f

Loadings V - [daN]

Minimum Weight

ADSS Cable

VEm = a Wm × g E × Sf × 0.98

Phase Conductor

-66 -40 0 - 0 0

Vm V = (n ×a ×g ×S +W )×0.98 -146 -60 0 - 69 69

Cm C Wm C f IT


ADSS Cable

TE

Phase

Due to Angle

TA = n × PE × sin α × Sf

Due to Wind

TW = a × v E × Sf

Total TE = TA + TW

Due to Angle

TA = n × n C × PC × sin α × Sf

0 0 0 0 884 530

592 355 0 - 237 142

592 355 0 0 1121 672

0 0 0 0 1414 849

Conductor Due to Wind 934 560 0 - 404 242

TC TW = (nC × a × vC + VIT + VIP ) × Sf

Total TC = TA + TW

934 560 0 0 1818 1091

WIND ON STRUCTURE

(TRANSVERSE)

Wind pressure on 1½ times the projected areas of rolled steel members of one longitudinal face of the tower [daN/m²]

320 240 - 320 240

Conductor/Shieldwire Unit Weight (Appendix T7)

Conductor/Shieldwire Unit Wind Force(Appendix T7)

Number of subconductors per phase (Appendix T1)

Weight of Insulator Set (Appendix. S1)

Wind on Insulator Set

Maximum Line Angle Deviation (Appendix T1)

Conductor and Insulator Design Data gC=0.58kg/m vC=2.029daN/m nC=1 W IT=70kg - Tension Set VIT=60daN - Tension Set α=0° - Crossing Side

Shieldwire Design Data gE=0.18kg/m vE=1.893daN/m - W IP=110kg - Pilot Jumper Set VIP=60kg - Pilot Susp. Set α=45° - Slack Span Side

Other Notations: a – Wind Span (Appendix T3) PC, PE – Conductor, Shieldwire Tension (Appendix T7) NOTE: Tower Design shall be carried out for the critical

aWM, aWm – Maximum, Minimum Weight Span (Appendix T3) Sf – Safety Factor (Appendix G3) cases with and without slack span loadings


Appendix T4 SAMPLE OF TOWER ULTIMATE LOADING COMPUTATION

Road Crossing Tower for Wooden Pole Lines


CO

ND

UC

TO

R L

OA

DIN

GS

(for

each a

ttachm

ent

poin

t specifie

d f

or

each t

ype o

f lo

adin

g)

132kV Single Circuit Tower; Twin ELM AAAC per Phase, Tower Type 1RCH/E2 CROSSING SIDE - α = 0° SLACK SPAN SIDE - α = 45°


Sf=2.5


Broken Wire Conditions (Breakage of up to two adjacent phases or the ADSS Cable)

Intact Wires Broken Wires

Construction & Maintenance Loadings

Sf=1.75 Calculation according


Sf=2.5 a=50m

Loadings for the Case of Unbalanced

Loadings on Crossing Side;Sf=1.5

Intact Wires

a= 125m a= 125m a= 0m

aWM=700m aWm=-150m aWM=700m aWm=-150m aWM=0m aWm=0m

PC=2364daN PE=1500daN PC=2364daN PE=1500daN PC=0daN PE=0daN n= 2 n= 2 n= 0

to page 3 of this Appendix and apply to all attachment points

step by step

aWM=250m aWm=0m

PC=900daN PE=500daN

a=50m aWM=250m; aWm=0m

PC=900daN PE=500daN


ADSS Cable: L E = PE × cos α × Sf 3750 2250 0 2567 -884 -530

L - [daN] Phase Conductor: LC = n c × Pc × cos α × Sf

ADSS Cable

11820 7092 0 7333 -2828 -849

Maximum Weight

VEM = aWM × gE × Sf × 0.98

Phase Conductor

309 185 0 1157 110 66

Vertical VM V =(n ×a ×g +W +W )×S ×0.98 2430 1458 0 3306 882 316

CM C WM C IT IP f

Loadings V - [daN]

Minimum Weight

ADSS Cable

VEm = a Wm × g E × Sf × 0.98

Phase Conductor

-66 -40 0 - 0 0

Vm V = (n ×a ×g ×S +W )×0.98 -358 -187 0 - 68 68

Cm C Wm C f IT


ADSS Cable

TE

Phase

Due to Angle

TA = n × PE × sin α × Sf

Due to Wind

TW = a × v E × Sf

Total TE = TA + TW

Due to Angle

TA = n × n C × PC × sin α × Sf

0 0 0 0 884 530

592 355 0 - 237 142

592 355 0 0 1121 672

0 0 0 0 2828 1698

Conductor Due to Wind 1568 941 0 - 657 394

TC TW = (nC × a × vC + VIT + VIP ) × Sf

Total TC = TA + TW

1568 941 0 0 3485 2092

WIND ON STRUCTURE

(TRANSVERSE)

Wind pressure on 1½ times the projected areas of rolled steel members of one longitudinal face of the tower [daN/m²]

320 240 - 320 240

Conductor/Shieldwire Unit Weight (Appendix T7)

Conductor/Shieldwire Unit Wind Force(Appendix T7)

Number of subconductors per phase (Appendix T1)

Weight of Insulator Set (Appendix. S1)

Wind on Insulator Set

Maximum Line Angle Deviation (Appendix T1)

Conductor and Insulator Design Data gC=0.58kg/m vC=2.029daN/m nC=2 W IT=70kg - Tension Set VIT=60daN - Tension Set α=0° - Crossing Side

Shieldwire Design Data gE=0.18kg/m vE=1.893daN/m - W IP=110kg - Pilot Jumper Set VIP=60kg - Pilot Susp. Set α=45° - Slack Span Side

Other Notations: a – Wind Span (Appendix T3) PC, PE – Conductor, Shieldwire Tension (Appendix T7) NOTE: Tower Design shall be carried out for the critical

aWM, aWm – Maximum, Minimum Weight Span (Appendix T3) Sf – Safety Factor (Appendix G3) cases with and without slack span loadings

Version 2 Specification of Design of 132 220 kV Overhead Power Lines on Lattice STEEL TOWERS

Appendix T4

SAMPLE OF TOWER ULTIMATE LOADING COMPUTATION

Road Crossing Towers for Wooden Pole Lines

Construction & Maintenance Loading Computation (Working)

132kV Single Circuit Tower; Single & Twin ELM AAAC per Phase

LOAD

DIRECTION

STEP 1 - SAGGING STEP 2 - NOT ANCHORED TOWER

CALCULATION

FORMULA

Loadings [daN]

Single ELM Twin ELM

AAAC per AAAC per

Phase Phase

nc=1 nc=2

CALCULATION

FORMULA

Loadings [daN]

Single ELM Twin ELM

AAAC per AAAC per

Phase Phase

nc=1 nc=2

Earthwire

Ts PE x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x sin α 0 PE x sin α 0

Vs PE x (tan δ + sin γ / cos δ) 661 PE x tan δ 180

Ls PE x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x cos α 70 PE x cos α 1467

Phase

Ts nC x PC x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x sin α 0 0 nC x PC x sin α 0 0

Vs nC x PC x (tan δ + sin γ / cos δ) 944 1889 nC x PC x tan δ 257 514

Conductors Ls nC x PC x (1- cos γ/cos δ) x cos α 99 199 nC x PC x cos α 2095 4190

Where

PE = 1467 daN

PC = 2095 daN

δ = 7°

γ = 19°

α = 0°

NOTE:

- Conductor sagging shall be done with pulling device located at

a distance of minimum 3 times the height of the respective

attachment point.

- The loadings, which result from stringing, cover also the

loadings which might appear during maintenance works.



Appendix T5

PARTICULARS OF SUPPORT DESIGN DATA

(to be confirmed by Tenderer/Contractor)

Item Description Details

1.

Maximum allowable ratios for members of lattice steel tower

1.1. Leg members, crossarms chords 120

1.2. Other load bearing compression members 200

1.3. Secondary bracings 250

1.4. Tension only members 350

2.

Steel to BS EN 10025 grade S235JR or other proposed

2.1. Elastic limit stress in tension members [N/mm²] 24000

2.2. Ultimate stress in compression members [N/mm²] Acc. to ASCE Manual No. 52

3.

Steel to BS EN 10025 grade S355JR or other proposed

3.1. Elastic limit stress in tension members [N/mm²] 35500

3.2. Ultimate stress in compression members [N/mm²] Acc. to ASCE Manual No. 52

4.

Bolts

4.1. Ultimate shear stress on bolts [N/mm²] 27600

4.2. Ultimate bearing stress on bolts [N/mm²] 43200 / 63000

4.3. Ultimate tensile quality of bolts [N/mm²] 50000

5.

Minimum Allowable Material Thickness/Size

5.1. Main legs thickness [mm] 6

5.2. Other stressed members [mm] 5

5.3. Redundant members [mm] 3

5.4. Steel below ground [mm] 6

5.5. Minimum bolt diameter for stressed connections M14

5.6. Minimum bolt diameter for unstressed connections M12

6.

Galvanizing (BS 729)

6.1. Steel articles, 5mm thick and over [g/m²] (μm) 900 (126)

6.2. Steel articles, under 5mm thick [g/m²] (μm) 675 (94)

6.3. Grey and malleable cast iron [g/m²] (μm) 900 (126)

6.4. Threaded works and other articles which are centrifuged [g/m²] (μm) 381 (53)



Appendix T6

PARTICULARS OF SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS

(to be completed/confirmed by Tenderer/Contractor)


A. 132 kV TOWERS, SINGLE CIRCUIT, SINGLE “ELM” AAAC

Item Description 1SS/E1

Details for Tower Type

1ST2/E1 1ST6/E1 1SD9/E1

1.

Supports

1.1. Basic Span length [m] 300 300 300 300

1.2. Design Ground Clearance of line conductor at maximum

temperature (including 0.6m creep allowance) [m]

7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3

1.3. Final sag of line conductor in still air at maximum

temperature (90°C) for basic span [m]

11.0 11.0 11.0 11.0

1.4. Height of bottom conductor at point of support [m] 18.3 18.3 18.3 18.3

1.5. Vertical spacing between shieldwire/OPGW and phase

conductor at point of support

1.6. Vertical spacing between adjacent phase conductors [m]

1.7. Total height of support above ground (standard tower) [m]

1.8. Horizontal spacing between conductors [m]

1.9. Final sag of line conductor at every day temperature for basic

span [m]

9.03 9.03 9.03 9.03

1.10. As above for shieldwire/OPGW [m] 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13

1.11. Overall dimension of support base at ground line [m]

- Transverse to line

- Parallel to line

1.12. Mass of complete support steelwork (including foundation

steelwork) [kg]

1.13. Total extra mass of steelwork for 3m extension [kg]



1.16. Maximum ultimate overturning moment at ground

line for standard tower [kN×m]


- Parallel to line

1.17. Maximum ultimate compression force per leg [kN]

1.18. Maximum ultimate uplift force per leg [kN]

2.

Foundations

2.1. Volume of concrete block foundation per tower – normal soil

2.2. Volume of concrete block foundation per tower – 100% soft rock


2.4. Volume of concrete block foundation per tower – hard rock

2.5. Volume of concrete block foundation per tower – poor soil


Appendix T6




B. 132 kV TOWERS, SINGLE CIRCUIT, TWIN “ELM” AAAC



1ST2/E2 1ST6/E2 1SD9/E2

1.

Supports




7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3



10.40 10.40 10.40 10.40








span [m]

8.33 8.33 8.33 8.33




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line



2.

Foundations








Appendix T6



C. 132 kV TOWERS, DOUBLE CIRCUIT, SINGLE “ELM” AAAC

Item Description Details for Tower Type

1DS/E1 1DT2/E1 1DT6/E1 1DD9/E1

1.

Supports




7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3



11.0 11.0 11.0 11.0








span [m]

9.03 9.03 9.03 9.03




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line



2.

Foundations








Appendix T6



D. 132 kV TOWERS, DOUBLE CIRCUIT, TWIN “ELM” AAAC



1.

Supports




7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3



11.0 11.0 11.0 11.0








span [m]

9.03 9.03 9.03 9.03




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line



2.

Foundations








Appendix T6



E. 132 kV TOWERS, SINGLE CIRCUIT, SINGLE “YEW” AAAC

Item Description 1SS/Y1


1ST2/Y1 1ST6/Y1 1SD9/Y1

1.

Supports




7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3



10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95








span [m]

8.40 8.40 8.40 8.40




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line



2.

Foundations








Appendix T6



F. 132 kV TOWERS, SINGLE CIRCUIT, TWIN “YEW” AAAC



1ST2/E2 1ST6/E2 1SD9/E2

1.

Supports




7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3



10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95








span [m]

8.40 8.40 8.40 8.40




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line



2.

Foundations








Appendix T6



G. 132 kV TOWERS, DOUBLE CIRCUIT, SINGLE “YEW” AAAC


1DS/Y1 1DT2/Y1 1DT6/Y1 1DD9/Y1

1.

Supports




7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3



10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95








span [m]

8.40 8.40 8.40 8.40




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line



2.

Foundations








Appendix T6



H. 132 kV TOWERS, DOUBLE CIRCUIT, TWIN “YEW” AAAC



1.

Supports




7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3



10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95








span [m]

8.40 8.40 8.40 8.40




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line



2.

Foundations








Appendix T6



I. 220 kV TOWERS, SINGLE CIRCUIT, SINGLE “YEW” AAAC


2SS/Y1 2ST1/Y1 2ST3/Y1 2ST6/Y1 2SD9/Y1

1.

Supports

1.1. Basic Span length [m] 390 390 390 390 390



7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6



13.30 13.30 13.30 13.30 13.30

1.4. Height of bottom conductor at point of support [m] 20.90 20.90 20.90 20.90 20.90






1.9. Final sag of line conductor at every day temperature for

basic span [m]

10.67 10.67 10.67 10.67 10.67

1.10. As above for shieldwire/OPGW [m] 9.61 9.61 9.61 9.61 9.61



- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]




1.16. Maximum ultimate overturning moment at

ground line for standard tower [kN×m]


- Parallel to line

1.17. Maximum ultimate compression force per leg

[kN]


2.

Foundations






SP-1114B Page T6-10 May 2008


Appendix T6



J. 220 kV TOWERS, SINGLE CIRCUIT, TWIN “YEW” AAAC


2SS/E2 2ST1/E2 2ST3/E2 2ST6/E2 2SD9/E2

1.

Supports




7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6



13.30 13.30 13.30 13.30 13.30








basic span [m]

10.67 10.67 10.67 10.67 10.67




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line


[kN]


2.

Foundations






SP-1114B Page T6-11 May 2008


Appendix T6



K. 220 kV TOWERS, DOUBLE CIRCUIT, SINGLE “YEW” AAAC


2DS/Y1 2DT1/Y1 2DT3/Y1 2DT6/Y1 2DD9/Y1

1.

Supports




7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6



13.30 13.30 13.30 13.30 13.30








basic span [m]

10.67 10.67 10.67 10.67 10.67




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line


[kN]


2.

Foundations






SP-1114B Page T6-12 May 2008


Appendix T6



L. 220 kV TOWERS, DOUBLE CIRCUIT, TWIN “YEW” AAAC


2DS/E2 2DT1/E2 2DT3/E2 2DT6/E2 2DD9/E2

1.

Supports




7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6



13.30 13.30 13.30 13.30 13.30








basic span [m]

10.67 10.67 10.67 10.67 10.67




- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]







- Parallel to line


[kN]


2.

Foundations






SP-1114B Page T6-13 May 2008


Appendix T6

PARTICULARS OF SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS (to be completed/confirmed by Tenderer/Contractor)

M. 132 kV TOWERS (1) FOR ROAD CROSSING (RC) USED FOR WOODEN POLE

LINES, SINGLE CIRCUIT, WITH HORIZONTAL CONDUCTOR FORMATION,

SINGLE (E1) OR TWIN (E2) AAAC "ELM" PER PHASE

Item Description

1. Supports


1RC/E1 1RC/E2

1.1. Basic Span length [m] 200 200

1.2. Design Clearance to Road with Level Surface of line

conductor at maximum temperature (including 0.6m creep

allowance) [m]



16.6 16.6

5.3 5.3

1.4. Height of bottom conductor at point of support [m] 21.9 21.9

1.5. Vertical spacing between ADSS Cable and phase


2.8 2.8

1.6. Vertical spacing between adjacent phase conductors [m] - -

1.7. Total height of support above ground (standard tower) [m] 22.8 22.8

1.8. Horizontal spacing between conductors [m] 4.85 5.25


basic span [m]

3.5 3.5

1.10. As above for ADSS Cable [m] 0.55 0.55



- Parallel to line


steelwork) [kg]


1.14. Maximum ultimate overturning moment at ground line for

standard tower [kN×m]


- Parallel to line



2. Foundations








APPENDIX T7: SYSTEM LOADING CONDITIONS

Appendix T7 Specification of Design of 132 220 kV Overhead Power Lines on Lattice STEEL TOWERS

Version 2

SP-11148 Page T7-1 May 2008

(U - -, :=(;3"40 j,.L

I I I I I I I# I, "'I 1 I I

1-

--,-,- -...,-

--,-,- -...,- --,-,- -- - --,-,- -...,-

- --,-,- -...,-

-, r 1- - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- .., r - --r, r, -if- - -- -T-r- r --,- r- --,- T- r

- - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - - ,.-. .., - - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

--,-,- -- - If- -:- - --,-,- -...,-

. --,-,- -...,- ..

I I I I

J:

. \,"'-_\)

..

I I I I

--,-,- -...,-

--,-,- -...,-

r - - - --,-,- -...,- .. ..

-.., .. .. --,-,- -...,-

I I I I --,-,- -...,-

0

System Loading Conditions; Conductor Data for Tower Design z - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - - -:- -·.../, -:- - - --,- T- r - - -E

....

6000

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

AAAC Elm Conductor I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I

I I I I 60.0

-

"..C... - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- ·-r - - -, - r - --,- T- r - - - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --, I-.., .. - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- -.., -...,-•.. ?_ - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - C)

c 5500 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1·1' I I I I I I I I 55.0 cu

·c;; c Q)

- - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- -:t- .,.....I.,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- .r•-, "¥' r, 1- -, - - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r -,-r-.or - -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - (.f.). 0 t-

5000 - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T- -- .... #(i- 1--,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - 50.0 u (-ij

I I I I

- - - - -

I I I I I I I I

--,-,--- - I I I I I I I I I I I I

I

r- - -

I I I

- - -

I I I I - '#..,-,- -...,-

I I I I I I I I

-, r 1- - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- .., r - - T- r - --,- - -1-ir -!If'- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - ::::J c - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - - -, _-# T,-'r .. --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - "C

0

·a:: 0 :I:

4500

- - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -n-11' -I"- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

- - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- ,._ -,.#Tr'r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1... I # I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

- - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,-- - - - - T- r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

- - -, - r - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T - r - - -:f- - - T- r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

c

45.0 0

I..

0 - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r -1,-"'r o - -- - - T- r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

(.)

;j "C c

u0

4000 - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r.. - .:.;f- -- -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

-I

- I

- I

- I

- I I I I I I I I

--I

,-,I

--I

- I

- I I I I I I I I I I I I

r- - I

- I

- I

- I

- ..·....!"'I " I I I I --,I -,-I -I...,I- -

I

- I I I I I I

- I

- - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - -..,- r - -.• T,_ rn--,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - -..,- r -._...#'- .,*r -,f" - -.., - - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

40.0

3500 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- -:- -.. -:,.._

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - 35.0 - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - jf .. 1-.. - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

- - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- -.. .., _, - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

... - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- . r-,....1_

1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

3000 I I I I

- - - - - I I I I I I I I

--,-,--- - I I I I I I I I - -:- -:-J.: • I .. I I --

I I I I I I I I

--,I -,-I -I...,I- - I

I I I I I I I

- - 30.0 -, r 1-

- - - -

- T- r - --,- - -- -T-r-

--,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - b-- .. --.-,-

- T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- r --,- r- --,- T- r -

-, r 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - 1- 'lJIIL T,_,. r- -r -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

- - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - r ..- - - tr-,-,- -- - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - - - -, - r - 1- - - "'"' r - - .., - - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - -JILl-.,"iil T"-#1r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

2500

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 14 I IL0 ..: .. 'I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T - 1i "'-1- ..,-r - - T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - 25.0

- - -, - r - 1- -

- T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T,.-" r - o-"

- 1' - - - - T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

- - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- -s:r-,-,- -- - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - .. - Iii Ll_" - - - - - T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

2000 -s- I I

-I I

I I I I

-

--,-,--- -

I I I I _J I" I ,J• I .. I I I I

I

r- - -

I I I

- - -

I I I I I I I I

--,I -,-I -I...,I- - I

I I I I I I I

- -

20.0

- -.., - -- T- r --,- -- -T-r-

--,-,- -- - - r - - .., - r-- - J,.. -r- - - - -- -T-

.., r - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r-

- -

r --,- r- --,- T- r -

- T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - - "l,.. r- --..- - I..- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - - -..,- r -- - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r -.r"-, - ,,._ - -r" T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - - -..,- r - - '-M'Jr- - -..,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - -.. r"-1-..-. .-. r - -- - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

1500 I I I I

- - -, - r - 1- - - -

I I I I I I I .. I .. ' I , • I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

- -- -T-r- --,-r-p·-1- -r-1-,....,-- - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

15.0

- - -, - r - 1- -

-T-r --,- - -- -T-r- --,- e.,_l_ - -,. -r ;rr -, - r - - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

1000

- - -, - r - 1- - - T- I- - I ...._ - -- -T-r- -.,.-,...!! r -10...-r- --;.,.. - - .., - r - - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - - - -, - r - 1- - - T- r - --,- T-+r - - - "- r - --, - r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

I I I - -t;LJ I I I ! .. T ,.I I _..I.. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

10.0

I ' I .., .,-T T . 10,._ .. ,. r I .., r I T r I r I I T r- I .., r I T r I .., I I T r .., r I ..., r I .., r ..., T r I

I .., r I I ,.. ·r - l" '"r r I I I I '

r 'L r I I T r- I .., r I T r I .., I I T r .., r I ..., r I .., r ..., T r I

I .., r I - . fP':?.Y• ..... -i .. • -1 T .,.r. I I

I .., r [ - .. ' I I I I I I I I I I .., r I T r I .., I I T r .., r I ..., r I .., r ..., T r I

. r - 1-- ;o .,-"'- r - --.., - -

T- r-

- r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T-

.., r

- - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r-

r --,- r- --,- T- r -

500 -I

--...-I

r-,.1.. •r I _4_'"T I ,. "

-I -

I I --,-,--- - I I I I I I I I I I I I I

r- - - I I I

- - - I I I I I I I I

--,I -,-I -I...,I- - I

I I I I I I I

- - 5.0

- -....,.-.......1-- -T..-.,..-r-"-,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -...,- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

.-,- -, - r,.-,.r• , .. T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - - - r - --,- r- --,- T- r - -

..-,..--r-'"r - 1- - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r- --,-,- -- - - r - --,- r- - - - T- r - - - - -- -T- r- - - .., - r - - - - T- r - --,- - -- -T-r-

0

150


Version 2

SP-11148 Page T7-1 May 2008

,

200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 Conductor Data for Tower Design

0.0

800 Conductor Characteristics

Conductor Type: AAAC ELM

Ultimate Breaking Load: S910 daN

Final Modulus of Elasticity: S884 daN/mm2

Coeff. of Linear Expansion: 2.300e-OOS 1fOC

Cross Sectional Area: 211.00 mm2

Dead Weight: O.S80 kg/m

System Loading Conditions:

1) E.D.S. at 3S°C, 20% UTS, Final (After Creep)

2) Minimum Temperature: soc, Transverse Wind of

97.1daN/m2

40% UTS, Final

3) Maximum Temperature: 90°C, Still Air, Final

4) Minimum Temperature: soc, Still Air, Initial

- Conductor unit vertical load: 0.569 daN/m

- Conductor unit wind force: 2.029 daN/m

-Maximum conductor final tension at minimum temperature and under design wind

pressure: 2364 daN

-Maximum conductor initial working tension at min. temperature, still air

(construction & maintenance condition check): 2095 daN

-Maximum conductor final working tension at every day temperature, still air (anti

Span [m]

Overall Diameter: 18.8 mm - Gradient Between Adjacent Support Points- Max. 10%

- Wind Force Coefficient: 1.1 cascade check): 975 daN

- Final sag at maximum temperature for basic span of 300m: 11.0m

- Final sag at maximum temperature for basic span

of2S0m (road crossing): 8.0m

Legend

----ConductorTension [daN]

Conductor Sag [m]


Version 2

SP-11148 Page T7-2 May 2008

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I --1- -t- t- -I---+- t- -1- -t- 1- -I- -1- +- t--- -t- t- -I- -1- - t- -1- -t- t--- -1- +- t- -1--

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I• ,1" I

- t- -1--1- +- f- -1- -t- t- -1--- +- t- -1- -t- 1--1--1- +- t-- -,-tr 1>' -1- -I-

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I " "f " 1 I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1,".'4 I I I I I I I I I I I

--1--!- +--I---+- f.- -1--!- 1- -I- -1- +-f.----!-+- -I- -1- -f.- -1--!- +--- -1- +-f.- -1-- -+--I- -1- +- f- -1--!- +--I---+- f.- -1--!- 1- -I- -1- + -1.---" -"-!-+--I- -I- - f.- -I- -! - +- - - -I- + - f.- -I--

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I " '•" I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _ I_ ..1 _ L _I _l_ L _I_ ..1 I I_ _l_ L ..1 _ L _I I L _I_ ..1 _ L I_ _l_ L _I_

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4 "11 " I I I I I I I I I I I I _ L _I_ ..1 _ L ...J _ .1 _ L _I_

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .A" • I "' I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ')" •f I I I I I I I I I I I I I

_ I I I I _ I I I I 1- I I I I I I fQ\ f- I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I \1 t1 I I I I I I I I ; I I I I I I 1 1 1 I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 I I I I I I I 1

I I I I I I I I I I I I ;I; I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 11 ir I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .. "',' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

- - - r - --- T- r - - - 1- - - - - T- r- - - r - - - - - r - - - r-- - - T- r - -- I I I I I I I I I I;"Jr" I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J,"' / ,( I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -1- -t- t- -1--- -t- t- -1- -t- -1--1- -t- t--- -t- t- -1--1- - t- -1- -t- t--- -1- -t- t- - -

I I I I I I I I "I " " I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - t- - - -t - t- - - '"1- -t - t- - -

1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I J." ' ,.f I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I " I""' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

--1--!- +--I---+- f.- -1--!- 1- -I- -1- +-f.----!-+- -I- -1- -f.- -1--!- +--- -1- +-f.- -1-- -+--I- -1- + - r- -1- -1 -.. .,-t-r- + - r- -1- -1- 1- -I- -1- + - r--- -1- +--I- -1- - f.- -I- -! - +- - - -I- + - f.- -I--

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I"' " r I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I,1,. "1,. 'I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

- L -1---.1- L -1- ..1- 1--1--1-.1- L-- ..1- L -1--1- - L -1- ..1- L-- -1-.1- L -1-- - L -1--1-.1- r-,.t- -1-'l. -1---.1- L -1- ..1- 1--1--1-.1- L-- ..1- L -1- ...J_ - L -1- ..1 - L - - ...J- .1 - L -1- -

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I "1>" "1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I / \ 1,. ", " " I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l,:) J<t " 'I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

II : 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 I I • ., I"' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

- -i- - -+- -i- - 1- -i- -i- +- -- - -i- -i- - -i- - -- -i- +- -i-- I 1oo " "\ " I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

- I "It I tl1 I I I -

I ---

I I I I 1- -

I I I I I I -

I I -

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I> -- - - - -- -T - - -I--I--I-T-r--1-l-1--1- - - - - --- -T-w,._ ....,.- "* !" I

-I -

I f-

I I I I---

I I I I 1- -

I -I -


- - -:- - - T- t--- (- -r)-:- -:- - -:- - r: -- ;1.-. ..i-:- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - t- -1- -1- -t- t- -1- -t- t- -1--- -t- t- -1- -t- -1- -1- -t- t--- -t- t- -1- '"1-

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I - t- - - -t - t- - - '"1- -t - t- - -

1 I I I I : I 4 I I I I I... "l" I I I



+- I I + f- I -! +- I + f.- I -! 1- I I + f.- -! +- I -I-

1 I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

- f.- -I- -! - +- - - -I- + - f.- -I--

I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111) I • " L " I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I 1 .\ 1

I ,.I" If. "1,. "I

,

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I

-:- ;

- I

-:I

--- +I

-I

-:I

- I

- -:I

--:I

- +I

-I

- I

1

-,.

-'1... .,1".,"

-'I

-:I

- I

- I

-- -:I

- +I

-I

-:I

- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

_ L _I I_.!_ t- _I_...!_ L _I .!_ L _I_...!_ _I I_.!_ L ...! _ L _I_ _I_


I I I I I I I I

_ L _I_ ...! _ L _I_ .! _ L _I

I I I I I I I I

1 I I I I I I I I I 1,.14•',.., '"I I I I I I I I I I

_1_ _!_.!. I _!_ _1_ _! I_ _,l.!!. !,.-.l'"_ -.!. .!. I 1 _1_ _! _ .!._ 1 _ _! _ _1_

I I I I I I I I ,1•1,..1 1,. I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I .I", '" •"1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _ .!._ _ I I_ _! _ t- _I_ _! _ .!._ _ I _! _ _I_ _! _ _ I I_ _! _ _! _ .!._ _ I_ _I _




I I I I I I I I

--I -

I--

I --

I ---

I--

I--

I --

I

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

I I I 1., ., '" I,. ol ,. I ,. • ., I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - t- -1- -1- -t- t- -1- -t- t- -1--- -t- t- -1- -t- -1- -1- -t- t--- -t- t- -1- '"1-

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I - t- - - -t - t- - - '"1- -t - t- - -

,.I" Ia •I'" .,;1'" I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I

"j I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I _ I I I I I I I I I I I I ,(, I, I I I I I I

1500

I -

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

z

-

-

,

1

....

'.0._.

2000

System Loading Conditions; Shieldwire Data for Tower Design

7/3.26 ACS Used with AAAC Elm Conductor

50.0 E....'

C) 8j

1:

·v; 1:

!

1: 0 N

·;:: 0 :I: '- 0 (.)

;:, '0 1: 0 ()

1000

;r-T-f-- - l- f

T- I- - l-

-- -T-I--l- f - -

- 45.0

40.0

- 35.0

- 30.0

25.0

- 20.0

... 0 t) ::J "C c 0 0

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1,. "1,. "I "

500

,....,...._ :-t.,.-...1""-1--; or.,_- t- -1- -t- -1--1- -t- t--- -t- t- -1--1- - t- -1- -t- t--- -1- -t- t- - -

0

- 15.0

_ 10.0

- 5.0

0.0

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 Conductor Characteristics System Loading Conditions: Conductor Data for Tower Design Span [m] Conductor Type: 7/3.26 ACS 1) E.D.S. at 3S°C 20% UTS, Final (After Creep) -Conductor unit vertical load: 0.382 daN/m

Ultimate Breaking Load: 7084 daN 2) Minimum Temperature: soc, Transverse Wind of -Conductor unit wind force: 1.235 daN/m

Final Modulus of Elasticity: 1SSSO daN/mm2 97.1 daN/m2

40% UTS, Final -Maximum conductor final tension at minimum temperature and under

Coeff. of Linear Expansion: 1.300e-OOS 1rc

Cross Sectional Area: S8.S6 mm2

Dead Weight: 0.390 kg/m



- Gradient Between Adjacent Support Points- Max. 10%

design wind pressure: 1595 daN



Legend

Overall Diameter: 9.78mm -Wind Force Coefficient: 1.3

- Shieldwire/Phase Conductor Sag Ratio: 90% at E.D.S.

-Maximum conductor final working tension at every day temperature, still

air (anti-cascade check): 730 daN


Conductor Sag [m]

SP-11148 Page T7-3 May 2008


I-ll- 1-1- 1- - L _I_ _l _ L I_ .1 _ L _I_

--I -

I--

I--

I ----

I -

I--

I--

I -

I I I I I I I I

- r- - - -t - r - - - - -t - r- - - -

.: :. -I-I 1-1- f-l-1 -I-I -1- 1-1 f-1 1-1- -1 l-1-1

_ L _I I_ .1 _ r- _I_ _l _ L _I .1 _ L _I_ _l _ _I I_ .1 _ L _l _ L _I_ _j _

_ .!.._ _ I I_ _.!_ _ f- _I_ _! _ .!.._ _ I _.!_ _ _I_ _! _ 1- _ I I_ _.!_ _ _! _ .!.._ _ I_ _I _

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

- r - - - - -t- r- - - -t- r - --- -t- r- - - -t- 1- - - - - -t- r--- -t- r ----- 1-

I -1 -I- -#-I -+,-" 1_,. - L _I_ _l _ L _ _j_.I, _ L ,.,L _ _1_ _! - _..J. _.!_ -.J:t _1

I I I I I ,I I •1 I - I-, -I- -! .... . , 1

I 1,, I I I ,f I I r- " r

- +- - - - + - f.- -1-

r"L - - _ L _ .J _ .1 _ L _I

+- -:- -1--!- +--I---+- f.- --!- -I- -1- +-f.----!-+- -I- -1- -f.- -1--!- +--- -1- +-f.- -1- -+--I- -1- +- r- -1--!- +--I---+- f.- -1--!- -I- -1- +-f.----!-+- -I- -1-

- _I _ _l _ L _I _l_ L _I 1- _I I_ _l_ L _l _ L _I I L _I_ _l _ L I_ _l_ L _I L _I I_ _l_ f- _I_ _l _ L _I _l_ L _I_ _l _ 1- _I I_ _l_ L _l _ L _I_ .J_

_I _ _!_.!.._ _I _.! _I _I I_ _.! _!_.!.._ _I I _I_ _!_.!.._ I_ _.! _I .!.. I I_ _.! r _I_ _!_.!.._ _I _.! _I_ _! I I_ _.! _!_.!.._ _I_ J,. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

' I r I I I I I .l. r -1-.1 - r - - 1-T - r - - - r Ff- -t - +- - - -1- + - r -I- - -,.lt. -1- -1 - L - - .J- .1 - L -1-

"- L _I_ J _ L _j _ l _ L _I


- r - - -, - r - - 1- T - r - - - - r- -I- -t - +- - - -1- + - r- -1-

- -I- -1 - +- - - -1- -1- - -I- - _ L _I_ _l _ L _j _ .1 _ L _I_

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1". I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ,J r I "I I 1,. .. I I I I

- --,- r - --- T- r - --,- - - - - T- r---,- r - - - -.., - - - T- r - - - r - - - - T- r- - --,- r - --- T- r -r"-,- _,_1_ T,.-•r---,- r - - -

- - - -t- r - --- -t- r- - - -t- 1- - - - - -t- r--- -t- r - - - - -- - - -t- r- - --- r - - - - -t- r- - - -t- r - --- -t -.---- - -t- 1-._1_ - -.,.-- r--- -t- r ------------- 1-

-1--!- +--I---+- f.- -1--!- -I- -1- +-f.----!-+- -I- -1- ---1- +-f.- -1- -+--I- -1- +- r- -1--!- +--I--- - o..t f.- -1- io.J! -I--f-+- f.----!-+- -I- -1- - _I _ _l _ L _I _l_ L _I _ _l _ 1- _I I_ _l_ L _l _ L _I I_ _ I_ _l_ L _I L _I I_ _l_ f- _I_ _l _ L _I_ -..-".1- L - ".1 _ 1- -.lr---"-1- .1_ L _l _ L _I_ .J_

1

I I I I I I I I

- r - - -, - r - - 1- T - r - - - r- - - -t - r - - ---1- -t - r- - - - - f.- -I- -! - +- - - -1- + - f.- -1- - L _I_ -1 _ L .J _ .1 _ L _I

I I I I I I I I

- -:- 4- -:-- -+- -:- 4- +- -- 4- -:- -:- - -:- 4- -- -: - -:- -:- +- 4 +- -- 4- -:- -

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I " I I 'I I 1 I I I I I I I

1--:- -:- f- -:- ; _!:_--; .._.. -:-; .._* 1--:- -:-

I I r I - T r I I I I T r I r I I r I I r I T r I I I T r I ,."1 r I ,.-. T r,.-o I I I T r I r I I

.J. -I -t 1- I I + r -t t- I I r I -t t- I + r I - t- I f.-,_, -t t-" '1- + " t- I -t 1- I I + r -t t- I -1 I -1 L I - .1 L I - I I .1 L -1 L -114.\-1 L I -1 L I .1 L I L I I .1 .,.. r- • I .,.. L I -1 I I .1 L -1 L I .J

I I I I I I I I I I I I l1l) I I I I I I I I I I I I •r I f I .I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I - I - - I - I - - - - T - I - - -

r11r ITrl

f-1-tt- -1-1-f-1-

LI-l.L .J.lLI

I I I I I I I I

I I I I - T I I I I I T r 1 I I I"' ;;q-"'r I,. '1".._ I I ,.f I I T r I I I I T I I I I I T I I I I I

I -t t- I - + r I -t + r -t t- I I ,.ho -"1 -t t- ,.-'t + r -..- t- I I + r I -t t- I + r I -t I I + r -t t- I -1

I -! +- I - + -! I I + f.- -! +- I I · • • f.- I -! ,._.._ I + !,.-'" I +- I I + r I -! +- I + f.- I -! I I + f.- -! +- I -1 I I I I ........r-1 I I I I I I I I I "1,. I I • " I I lo "1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I - I T I I I I

.: .: - -I- -1 - +- - - -1- -1- - -I- -

I I I I I I I I I I

r 1 -, r T r 1

r I -t +- -1 + r- I

f.- I -! +- -1 + f- I I I 1 I 1 I I I

- - - - - +- -:- - -:- -:- +- :; --r- :- -:: -v- - - t r- i- +- -:- - -:- -:- +- r- -:- - - :--- +- -:- - -:- -:- +- -- - -:- - - -:--- T- r - --,- - - - - T..

- - - r - --- T- r - - - -1;"..-r-•T- r- - -.,-·- - - - - ;.-r- - r-- - - T- r - - - r - - - - T- r- - - - r - --- T- r - - - - - - - T- r- - - r - - -

-1--!- +--I---+- f.- -1- .... I- -1- + -!-, -..!!. 4- +--I- -1-.. !!. f.- -1--!- +--- -1- +-f.- -1- -+--I- -1- +- r- -1--!- +--I---+- f.- -1--!- -I- -1- +-f.----!-+- -I- -I-

_ L _I_ J _.!.._ _I_ l _ L _I_

I I I I I I I I - r - - -, - r - - 1- T - r - - - r - - 1- r - - 1-T - r - - - f.- -I- -! - +- - - -1- + - f.- -I-

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I ,•; I I .1••1"' I I ·· I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

•

-+-·4·-·p-:--; -+--7-"i- -;;: -:or1"-'V-- 4- -:--:- - -:-4- -- -:- +- -:- - -:--:- +- r- -:-4- -:--- +- -:-4- -:--:- +- -- 4- -:- -

.-...-.- ·--r"'-"'r - .. .-- .-.-.----r..!!' - - - - T- r-- 1- r - - - - - r - - 1- r-- - - T- r - - - r - - - - T- r- - - 1- r - --- T- r - - 1- - - - - T- r-- 1- r - - ...,-

l l l l l l l l l l l l

_ L _I_ J _.!.._ _I_ l _ L _I_

I I I I I I I I -I- - l- f-- - - T- I- - - r - - 1- r - - 1-T - r - - - r- -I- -t - +- - - -1- + - r- -1- i i l l i i

'.0....

I:

·v;

5000 I:

,

c

Version 2

System Loading Conditions; Conductor Data for Tower Design

..... 5500 z

(..i.j.

10\ AAAC Yew Conductor

1 I I I I I I I

-t - r - - ---1 -#-t - r- - - -

50.0

45.0

E.... C)

a.. 0 t) :::s

I: 0 N 'i: 0

:.:.I.: .... (.)

'0 I: 0

4500

4000

- ..-: -..t - -

40.0 "C

0 0

35.0

() 3500

3000

2500

2000

30.0

25.0

20.0

15.0

1500

1000

1

_I_ J- L -- -' 1_ _I_ J-.. io!!.

-·1"'---,- r -.ro·--r- - r - -,.,.....,-- - - T- r - - - r - - - - T- r- - --,- r - --- T- r - --,- - - - - T- r---,- r - -

•- l- - _,. J -T

_I I_ - _I_ J- L-- _I_ l- _I_ - L _I I_ l- r- _I_ J- L _I_-- l- _I_ J- _I I_ l- -- J- L _I_ _I_

10.0

5.0

500 .-Lo---t..-t--"'1-"-'- +- r- -1- -t- -I- -1- +- r--- -t- +--I- -1- - r- -1- -t- +--- -1- +- r- -1- -+--I- -1- +- r- -1- -t- +--I---+- r- -1- -t- -I- -1- +- r--- -t- +--I- -1-

0.0

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 Conductor Characteristics

Conductor Type: AAAC Yew

Ultimate Breaking Load: 13420 daN

Final Modulus of Elasticity: S600 daN/mm2

Coeff. of Linear Expansion: 2.300e-OOS 1JOC


Dead Weight: 1.319 kgfm

Overall Diameter: 28.42 mm


1) ED.S. at 3S°C, 20% UTS, Final (After Creep)

2) Minimum Temperature: soc, Transverse Wind of

97.1 daN/m2 40% UTS, Final



- Gradient Between Adjacent Support Points- Max. 10%

- Wind Force Coefficient: 1.1

Conductor Data for Tower Design

-Conductor unit vertical load: 1.293 daN/m

-Conductor unit wind force: 3.036 daN/m

-Maximum conductor final tension at minimum temperature and under design

wind pressure: 5370 daN



-Maximum conductor final working tension at every day temperature, still air

(anti-cascade check): 2680 daN

- Final sag at maximum temperature for basic span:

Legend

Span [m]

- 132kV Towers (Basic Span of3S0m): 10.95m

- 220kV Towers (Basic Span of 390m): 13.3m


-----· Conductor Sag [m]


SP-11148 Page T7-4 May 2008

c:

0

I I - T I I I I I I I I I I

J,-"' -,t - ,-n - --

1'

I I I I I I I ...! I I .. '

I I I

-r- 1 I I I I I I I

-

()

Version 2 System Loading Conditions; Shieldwire Data for Tower Design 7/3.26 ACS Used with AAAC Yew Conductor

..... 4000 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .. I .. .., I I I 40.0

E _ I_ _l _ L _I_ _ _ .1 _ L _I _ _l _ _ I_ _j _ .1 _ L _l _ L _ I_ _j _ _ L _I_ _l _ L _j _ .l _ L _I_ _ L _ I_ _j _ .l _ f- _I _ _l _ L _ I_ _ _ .l _ L _I_ ..l _ _ I_ _j _ .l _ L ..l _ L _ I_ _j _ _ L _1.....,.:1 - _ _j _ .l _ L _I _

z r- - - ;- r - 1- - - -r - r- - - -r - 1- - 1- ""1 - -r - r- - - -r - r - 1- ""1 - - r- ""1- ..,. - t>O- - ""1 - -r - r- - - -

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I «! - - - - r - - - - -t - r- - - - 1- - 1- ""1 - -t - r- - - - r - 1- ""1 -

I I I I I I I I - r- - - - r - - ""1- -r - r- - - -

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - r - 1- ""1 - -r -

1,. I, I., I I I I

"..C... _ I_J_L_I j_l_l_j l_ _l_l_l j_L_I_ _I_ _ _I_ J _ L _I_ l _ _I_ - L -I_ _I - l - f- _I_ J - L -I_ - - l - L _I_ J - -I_ _I - l - L - - J - L -I_ _I - -+.._.._IL..J !._ - - _I - l - L _I_

c: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .'1 '"I ..I, I I I I I

- -1- -t - +- -I- - - + - f- -1- -t - 1- - 1- -1 - + - f- - - -t - +- - 1- -1 - - f- -I- -t - +- - - -1- + - f- -I- - - +- - 1- -1 - + - f- -I- -t - +- - 1- - - + - f- -I- -+ - 1- - 1- -1 - + - f- - - -+ - +- - 1- -1 -.. - ;

.lr -1-:i- '+ - +- - - -1 - + - f- -I- -

·c;; 3500

(-ij I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I


- -1- -1 - 1- -I- - - -1- - -1- -1 - 1- - 1- -1 - -1- - - - -1 - 1- - 1- -1 -

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - - I - I - - - - T - I - - I - -1- I - T - I - - I - I -1- I -

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

- -I- -1 - 1- - - -1- -1- - -I- - I I I I I I I I

- r - - 1- r - - 1- T - r - -

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l' ,I ,_ I I I I I I 35.0

_ _ I_ ..1 _ L _I_ _ _ .l _ L _I_ ..1 _ 1- _ I_ _j _ .l _ L c: ..1 _ L _ I_ _j _ - L _I_ ..1 _ L _j _ .L _ L _I

0 N

.i:: 3000 :I:

- -I -

I -

I - I

- - I -

I -I -

I - 1- -1- I - T - I - - I - I -1- I -


I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - - - - r - - - - -t - r- - - - 1- - 1- ""1 - -t - r- - - - r - 1- ""1 -

I I I I I I I I

- r - - 1- r - - 1- T - r - - - I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I - r- - - - r - - ""1- -r - r- - - -

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1," I I,'I I I I I I I I I I I

-r- ""1--r-f---1-;-r- ---r-r--1--r-1-- ""1- -rL- -r- ""1- -r--1--r-r--""1--r-r--1--

30.0

-0 - _I_ J - L _I_ - - l - L _I_ J - 1- _I_ _I_ l - L - - J - L _I_ _I_ --

I -

I--

I--

I ---

I--

I--

I--

I - - L _I_ _I _ l _ f- _I_ J _ L _I l _ _I_ J _ 1- _I_ _..1 .!.,..! .,- _!. J _ L _I_ _I _ _ _I_ J _ L _I _ l _ _I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I

(.) - -1- -t - +- -I- - - + - f- -1- -t - 1- - 1- -1 - + - f- - - -t - +- - 1- -1 - - f- -I- -t - +- - - -1- + - f- -I- - - - -!-r--:- - - --!- -:-1-1-- - --1- - - - -:-1- -- -!- -:--

::I "cC:

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - - - - -- - - - - - - -- - - -- - -1--l-

I I I I I I I I -I- - 1-f-- - - T- I- -

1 I I I I I I I I I I I ' I *I 1

I I I I I I I I I I I I I - f - - - - T- r- - - - f - --- T - - - T- f - - - - - - - T- f-- - - T - - -

0 2500

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - - - - -- -,-,- - - - - -,- -- - - - - - - - - -- -T-r-1-

I I I I I I I I I I I" " J' I I I I I I I

-r-ri-T-r-- - -,-r--T - 1- rri_T_r-- -r-rl-

I I I I I I I I

- - - - -- -T-r-1-

25.0

- _I_ ..1 _ L _I .L_ L _I_ ..1 _ 1- _I_ _j_ .L_ L ..1 _ L _I_ _j L _I_ ..1 _ L _j_ .L _ L _I - L _I_ _j_ .L _ f- _I_ ..1 _ L _I - L - - ...1..-1- _I_ _j_ .L _ L ..l_ L _I_ _j_ -L_I_..l_L _j_.L_L_I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

l"""trl--rrl"""t 11-rr """tt-11 r1"""tr 1-rr1

I I I I I I I I ,. "1 · I ,1• I I I I I I I I

r 1 1 -r r- 1 """! r 1 ..... -rr r :1.. -r · r 1 -r

I I I I I I I I

, , ' T r 1 _ I I I I _ I I I I 1- I I I I I I --(l""l'""' I I I I I I I I I I I I ,_ _ _, .1 .l- .. _I I 1- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _

2000 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I \ILJI I I I I

_ ' '

I '

_ '

I ' '

I ' ·, '

I I I I I '

I '

I I I _

I I I I I I -1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -1-tt-1- 1-tl-1-1-tf- -tt-1-1 f-1-tt- -l+f-1-

1 I I I I I ,.II' I .. I ,. f I I I I I I I I I I

' ' ... ' ' ' I I I I f- I"' I 1.. I .,. " I I I I 1- I I I I I I I I I I I I ..---! 1•'1 1,- I I I I I I I I I I I I +- I fA-'+ f- I-. +- ..-1 - + f- I -+ I- I -1 + f- -+ +- I -1

I I I I I I I I

I '

I I '

I I '

_

I I I I I I I I f-1-tt- -l+f-1-

20.0

-- : -+- -:-4-1--:- -+- --4- -:- - - -:-4- -- -+- -:-- I I \Yjf - -

.., I ,.t --, ,_ ..

I I I

- -

I I

- - -

I I I I

-

I I I I

- - - -

- - - - -- - - -1--

I 1-;r T - - I 1- - - T I I 1- - 1- - - T I I I 1- - -

1500

1000

-1-1--1----1-- -1--1- 1- -I- -1--1-- -- -1-1- -I- -1- - -1--1-1----1--1-- -1--

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - 1- .... 1!- -r-r - f- il" - -1 - 1- - 1- - - -1- - -1- -1- - 1- - 1- -1 - -1- - - - -1- - 1- - 1- -1 -

..1" I ,1"1 ) I .." I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I' ,.1• I " I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

- -L .l-f-_I_.J_L_L _l_L_I_..l_I-_L_j _ _l_L ..l_L_L_j _ " I l "(Ill\ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -rrr ft-r-- -,-r-r--T-r- -,- -r -T-r--,-r-ri-

L_L_I_l_r-_I_.J_L_L l_L_I_.J L_I _ _L_L _!_L_L_I _ I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

r 1""1 -r f-1""1 r 1- -r r-1-r 1""1 -r r -r r 1""1


I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I +- 1-1 +f-I-t+- 1- +f-I-t 1-1 + f- -+ +- 1-1

- -1- -1- - 1- - - -1 - -1- - -1- -

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

_ L_I_..l_L _j _ _l_L_I

I I I I I I I I -r- -,-r-- -T-r-1-

_ L_I_ _!_L _I _ _L_L_I_

I I I I I I I I

r-1-rr ""1"trl

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I f-1-tt- -l+f-1

15.0

10.0

- I I I I _ I I I I 1-

-'- L I I I ,.(' _,. 1,. "1 I ..oil" I I 1 -

1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I _ I I I I I I I I I I I I I ,1,. 1 .. -, ' -

I -1 1- I - -1- I -1 I -1 -1- ..-1'" '1- k1'"' J:--- r -1 1- -1 -1- I

I I I I I I I 1_ -

1-1-1-1- I

i l l I I I I I

I I I I 1- I ' _.,. "' I,._,.I.. I' ... I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

500

o 1 I 1 1

I- T I I I !."1' I ,.#! I1,.'1 I I I I IT I I- I I I I I J. " r I I• " I ,. "' I I I I I I I I I

IIITf--1111-

1 I I I I I I I

T I I I I I I I

1- I IT I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

r 1 1 r I I I I

I T I I -

I I I I 5.0 I I I I I I I - .. 1 1,•1" I ,."1" I I I I I I I I I I I

- - - """!- r - --- -r- ;-..-,-";- 1- • "" - -r,.-..r-..!!- """!- r - - - - r - - """!- r- - - -r- r - - _I _ _! _ L _I, .!!. L ,_j,_.._r _I,.. "-".! _ L _! _ L _I_ _I_ _ L _I_ _! _ L _I_ l _ L _I_

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -r- --r-f-- -;-r- ---r-r- --r-1-- --r-r---r-r- 1-

-L_L_I_l_r--1-.J_L_L l_L_I_.J L_I _ _L_L _!_L_L_I _

I I I I I I I I

- r - - -r - r - - 1- -r - r - - - _ L_I_ _!_L _I _ _L_L_I_

r-- """! -.r.-.o - _,

- 1.. r--r- """!- - - ""1- -t- r-- """!- r - - ""1- - r - - """!- r-- ""1- -r- r - -

I ,.1., ..1• "l ,. .I ,. ' '" I ,. j, • ioo '" I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -r- ""1--r-f--1-"""t-r- ---r-r--1--r- - ""1--r-r----r-r- ""1-

I I I I I I I I -r--1--r-r--""1--r-r--1-

• I"' •1,-. ,-.I•-

-t-•---

I--

I --

I -I- -

I--

I--

I --

I ---

I--

I --

I -

I- --

I -

I--

I --

I ---

I--

I --

I --

I _L_L_I_l_r-_I_J_L_L l_L_I_j L_I_l_L j_L_L_I

_ --

1 -

I--

I --

I ---

I--

I --

I --

I

1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

0

150 200 250 300 350 400


450 500 550 600 650

1 I I I I I I I

700 750

0.0

800 Conductor Characteristics

Conductor Type: 7/3.26 ACS

Ultimate Breaking Load: 7084 daN

Final Modulus of Elasticity: 1SSSO daN/mm2

Coeff. of Linear Expansion: 1.300e-OOS 1rc Cross

Sectional Area: S8.S6 mm2 Dead Weight:

0.390 kg/m

Overall Diameter: 9.78 mm


1) E.D.S. at 3S°C, 20% UTS, Final (After Creep)

2) Minimum Temperature: soc, Transverse Wind of 97.1daN/m2,

40% UTS, Final

3) Maximum Temperature:

80°C, Still Air, Final


-Gradient Between Adjacent Support Points- Max. 10%


SP-11148 Page T7-5 May 2008

-Wind Force Coefficient: 1.3 Conductor Data for Tower Design



-Maximum conductor final tension at minimum

temperature and under design wind pressure: 2220

daN

-Maximum conductor initial working tension at min.

temperature, still air


Legend

Span [m]

- Shieldwire/Phase Conductor Sag Ratio: 90% at E.D.S. -Maximum conductor final working tension at every day temperature,

still air (anti-cascade check): 880 daN ----ConductorTension [daN]

-----· Conductor Sag [m]

SP-11148 Page T7-5 May 2008

I I I I I

I

-

5.0

.....

Version 2

3000

A ooendix T7 Specification of Design of 132 220 kV Overhead Power Lines on Lattice STEEL TOWERS

System Loading Conditions; Road Crossing Tower for Wooden Pole Lines

l

z (IS

t:

·c;; t:

I I I I I I I I

------,------ - ------ -,------ - -------

- - - - - - - ,I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,I - - - - - - - I- - - - - - - I I I I

- - - - - - - -t - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - -+ ------------------------ 1- - - - - - -

I I I I

- - - - - - -! - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - -+ ------------------------ 1- - - - - - - I I I I

I I I I I 1 1 1

I I I I I I I I

------ - ------- r------ ...,------- r------ ------ - ------- -r------ - ------- r------- I I I I I I I I

------ - ------- r----- - ------- r------------- -1------- -r------ -1------- r------- I I I I I I I I

------ -1------- +--------I-------f-------- -------I-------+------ -1------- +--------

I I I I I I I I

------ -1------- +--------I------- f.------- -------I-------+------ -1------- +-------- I I I I I I I I

15.0 E'

(..6.. 2500 I I I I I I I I I I I I

12.5 t: - - - - - - - ..1 - - - - - - _I_ - - - - - - ..l - - - - - - _I_ - - - - - - - - - - - - _I_ - - - L .J L I .l I L _ 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I

'i:: - - - - - - ..1 - - - - - - _I_ - - - - - - ..l - - - - - - _I_ - - _ _ _ _ _ I L .J L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ I .l I L _

0 :I: Q)

il

2000


-------...!_-----_I_------...!------ _I_------ ------_I_------ L------ _j_------ L------------- _I_------...!------ _I_-----_.!..------- I I I I I I I I I I I I

1------- :-------:-------:-------:------- -------:-------: ------ :-------: ------- -------:-------: ----(2-:-------: -------

10.0

(J)

1--- : I I

;;-I ::::::((." :: = !- :T_.c:- I - I1 1I

I1 1I -

1- = = = = = = j= = = = = = =!= = = = = = = i = = = = = = =!= = = = = = = = = = = = = =!= = = ----t -:--- - ------'r Jr 3J·L_ --- ----- - - ------ :------

-i------- ------:

1500


- ---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -t - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - r - - - - - - 1- - - - - - - r - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1- - - - - - - -r - - - - - - -1- - - - - - - r - - - - - - - I I I I I I I I I I I I


- - - - - - -! - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - -! - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - - - - - - - -1- - - - - - - +- - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - f.- - - - - - - - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - + - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - +- - - - - - - -


- - - - - - - -1 - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - -1 - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - - - - - - - -1- - - - - - - +- - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - f.- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - + - - - - - - -I- - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - I I I I I I I I I I I I

7.5

- - - - - - - ..1 - - - - - - _I_ - - - - - - ..l - - - - - - _I_ - - - - - - - - - - - - _I_ - - - L .J L I .l I L _

I I I I I I I I I I I I - - - - - - ..1 - - - - - - _I_ - - - - - - ..l - - - - - - _I_ - - _ _ _ _ _ I L .J L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ I .l I L _

I I I I 1 I I I I I I I

1000 r-------- '-------+'-------- -------- ---------- ---1 - ------- ------- ------ '-------- ------ IL_ L_I L_I l_l -+ I I I I I I I I I I 1 1

------- :-------:------- :-------:------- -------:-------: ------ :-------: --------------:-------:-------:------- +..-;_-..-...e :.:.

------ iI------ -:I ------- iI ------ -I:------- -------:I ------- iI ------ I:-------Ii------ -------:I------- iI -- :t I:;-..-..-<L·-•-•-"T1 ------- ------.. 1 ,------ - -------..1.,------ - ------- ------ - ------- r----- --,------- r------ ------ - ----- -..-..1"'- ..---- - ------- r------ -

I I I I I I I I I ,.. ..... • I I I 1- - - - - - - I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I - - - - - - I- - - - - - - I - - - - - - - - - - ;;;; ,.. •j- - - - - - - T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - T - - - - - - -

I I I I I I I I - .. .. •" • I I I I 500 I o I I o I I !•" 1 I I I 2.5 ------ -j------ -I--------t------ -1 --- 1------- -...........,.!! ---- t------- -------I-------+------ -1------- t--------

1-------

I I I I I I I a,.""' I I I I I

t--- I I I I I ,. ..1• •" I I I I I I -t------ -I--------+ -------I------- - -- .. ;;:l;r .... "'- --- +--------I-------f-------- -------I-------+------ -I-------+--------

- - - - - - I

- - - - - - -:I

- :::1I

:-:;,;-.-. ----7I

-·-•

-•

-• l

-"

-•

-•

-•

---:I

- ------ I

------ I

- ------I

------ -------:I

- ------ I

---1,r,-(I3J,-r4J - - I

- - - - - - - ;;;;;;.- - -- ...-- _,-·------J --------------------- 1 ------- ------ -1 ------- L----- ...Jf-------L------ .-------1------- ,;;;;;; .-...-.l-.-.-..,-.-..--..J..---•-- .-

I 1 1 ••• .L..---••• •••••••1----•••

0 ·1- -1 • .. • ... • • - • - t' • • • • • • • 1- - - - • • • .;. • • • • - - • • • • • .,. .,. • - • I I

50 100 150

0.0

200

Conductor Characteristics

Conductor Type: ADSS Cable

Maximum Working Tension: 2000 daN

Final Modulus of Elasticity: 1300 daN/mm2

Coeff. of Linear Expansion: 1.1OOe-006 1rc



Overall Diameter: 1S.OO mm


1) E.D.S. at 3S°C, Final (After Creep)


Maximum Tension: 2000daN, Final

3) Maximum Temperature: sooc, Still Air, Final


- Wind Force Coefficient: 1.3


-Conductor unit vertical load: 0.177 daN/m

-Conductor unit wind force: 1.893 daN/m





- Final sag at maximum temperature for basic span of 200m: 0.54m Legend

Span [m]

SP-11148 Page T7-6 May 2008


Conductor Sag [m]

Version 2

May 2008

I I I I

I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I ----- +----------- -1------ f------ +----------- -1------ f------ +----------- -1------ f------ +----------- -1------ f------ +------

I I I I I I I I I * I I I I I I I I I ' I I I I I I I I I ,

- - - - - - -1- - - - - - - - - - - - -1- - - - - - f- - - - - - -1- - - - - - - - - - - - -1- - - - - - f- - - - - - -1- - - - - - - - - - - - -1- - - - - - f- - - - - - -1- - - - - - - - - - - - -1- - - - - - f- - - - - - -1- - # - - -

I I I I I I I I (2)' I," I I I I I I I I ·1

I I I I I I I I " I

------ ------ ----- -:------ ------ ------ ----- -:------ ------ ------ ----- -:------ ------ ------ ----- -:------ - .!-- --- -.-._)

I I I I I I I I 11 I tl I I I I I I I I ,' I tt

-----+----------- -:------------ +----------- -:------------ +----------- -:------------ +----------- -:- -..--.. ---- (:3-)-.( ----- I I I I I I I 1,. t t f I

I I I I I I I • "I '(4) I I I I I I I I ,.' I ,.tt I

I I I I I I I "., I I I I I I I I I * I t f I

I I I I I I I " I tt I

I I I I I I I "" I t I 1- - - - - - T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - f- - - - - - T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - f- - - - - - T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - f- - - - - - T - -..-- - - - - - - - - -..t_ - - - - f- - - - - - T - - - - - -

: : : : : : ,. "" ••• I :

I I I I I I "" I fl I I - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - -I- - - - - - f- - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - -I- - - - - - f- - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - -I- - - - - - f- ;; ;-"- - - + - - - - - - .-•- - - - -I- - - - - - f- - - - - - + - - - - - -

I I I I I I "* I t t I 1

I I I I I I "" I tt I I I I I I I I ," I t t I I

------ -1------- ----- -1------ f------ -1------- ----- -1------ f------ -1------- ----- -1...... ---- f------ .,t----- ----- -1------ f -------- 1-------

I I I I I .. 1 ttl I I

I I I I I ,. "" I t t I I I

I I I I I ,. " I t I I I I

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -:- - - - - - f- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -:- - - - - - f- - - - - - - - ;•••)- - - - - -:- - - - •.- 1-t- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -:- - - - - - f- - - - - - - - - - - -

I I I I I .. " I It I I I

I (2) I I I "I" II 11 I I I I I I I "• I ,1t1 I I I

I I I I .,. • I t J I I I I

I I I I ,. "' •.. I t "•"t I I I 1

----+I

------ ----- -I

:------ ------ +I

------ ---;.-...-+I

- · -,.

-"

-- ------ +I

-.,_....-t

- ----- -I

:------ ------ +I

------ ----- -I

:------ ------ +I

------ I I I ,."'" I ••• I I I I : )"--:------f-..- ---.. -; :-- ----------:--.-.-••,J.----:----------- -:------ -:------ f------:------

I I ,. I t t I I I I I I I .,. .... I tf I I I I I

f------:-----------

----- ------ :!.[. _-..- f- ----- ----- -.;;.-,_,- :! ---- f------ ------ ------:------ f------ ------ ------:------ f------ ------

I .,. .. • I I tl I I I I I I

., ,. 1.,. • • " I - I I I I I I I

- _- ...--"- - -1- - - - - - - - - - - - -I- - - - - - f- - - - f .-'Il-L" I f- -1- - I f- -1- - I f- -I- - I I • a a l I I I I I I I ....... I I I 1

I ••••••r I I I

-

-

z

....

'...... c:: 0 .iii c::

(6

c:: 0 N

·o::: 0 :I: I..

0 (.)

::;:, '0c::

u0

Version 2

1500

1000

500


System Loading Conditions; Road Crossing Tower for Wooden Pole Lines

ADSS Cable Data for Tower Design (Slack Span Side) 7.5

5.0

2.5

0 • • • • • • • • • .. • • I

30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

0.0

120

Conductor Characteristics

Conductor Type: ADSS Cable

Maximum Working Tension: 1SOO daN

Final Modulus of Elasticity: 1300 daN/mm2

Coeff. of Linear Expansion: 1.1OOe-006 1rc Cross Sectional Area: 177.00 mm2


Overall Diameter: 1S.OO mm


1) E.D.S. at 3S°C, Final (After Creep)


Maximum SOOdaN, Final

3) Maximum Temperature: sooc, Still Air, Final


-Wind Force Coefficient: 1.3








- Final sag at maximum temperature for basic span of 1OOm: 4.00m Legend

Span [m]

----ConductorTension

Conductor Sag [m]

SP-11148 Page T7-7

May 2008


Appendix T8

TOWERS ACCESSORIES

Item Description Single Circuit Double Circuit

Lines Lines

1. Anticlimbing Devices at a height of 3m to 4.5m with gate secured

with padlock

Yes Yes

2. Bird Guards over all suspension insulator strings Yes Yes

3. Step Bolts fitted between Ground Level and 1m of earthwire peak On one leg On two diagonally

(right side) opposite legs

(right side)

4. Ladders (BS 4211, 350mm between internal faces and 300mm

rung spacing) fitted between waist & gantry on one face only

Yes, on towers

with horizontal -

conductor

formation only

5.

Plates of anticorrosive material or enameled iron (washers of approved design to be used)

5.1. Danger Plates (red with white background) One per tower One per tower

5.2. Tower Number Plates One per tower One per tower

(acc. to SP-1106) (acc. to SP-1106)

5.3. Phase Color Plates (Red, Yellow, Blue) One set per tower Two sets per

(acc. To SP-1106) tower

(acc. to SP-1106)

5.4. Property Plates / Line Identification One set per tower Two sets per

(acc. to SP1106) tower

(acc. to SP1106)

5.5. Aerial Number Plates One at each tenth One at each tenth

tower tower

5.6. Hazard Warning Plates On the towers On the towers

provided with provided with

warning lights warning lights


-+

Version 2

APPENDIX E1

Specification of Design of 132 & 220 kV Overhead Power Lines on Lattice STEEL TOWERS

a) BORED PILE FOUNDATION

Standard Earthing

b) EXCAVATED FOUNDATION

Ground Level

2

I

.I

.... .. I ::::::::·1

3

Two complete

rotations on the bottom of the foundation

One coil of stranded copper conductor

installed around

the edge of the excavation.

j_

I Standard Earthing

-I· osite Le s Line

Standard· Earthing

(QpP.OSite ro s). _l

Line

I

T SP-11148

direction

LEGEND I 1 - Tower Earth Clamp for 70sq.mm Cu - Bolt M12.

2 PVC Sleeve (where Copper Conductor is Embedded in Concrete). 3 - 70sq.mm Stranded Copper Conductor.

4 - Top PVC sleeve near the lug shall be sealed with denso tape (or similar)

Page E1/1

direction

MAY 2008

'C=<D


a) Counterpoise Conductor APPENDIX E2

Additional Earthing

b) Earth Rods

Ground Level Ground Level

E E

. . :;:::; ".1." :;::; ·..·-- ---· .

Stub Angle Stub Angle

-1-(i) 60m Counterpoise

Stan ard

I Eart ing I

Line I -· ·- -·

direction Line

direction

I I I I I

60m Counterpoise 0-1- - -

LEGEND 1 - Additional earthing, 2x60m, 70mm2 stranded copper counterpoise.

2 - Tower earth clamp for 70mm2 Cu - Bolt M12.

NOTE The earthing connections from tower to the additional earthing shall be specially protected against corrosion up to a point 1 meter below ground by the application of Denso Paste and

Denso Tape (or similar).

SP-11148

Page E2/1

LEGEND 1 - 70mm2 stranded copper conductor.

2 - Tower earth clamp for 70mm2 Cu - Bolt M 12.

3 - Copper clad steel rod - ¢16mm, 3m (2x1.5m).

4 - Rod coupling clamp.

5 - Conductor/rod clamp.

MAY 2008

+-

I

/

/ /

/

I /

"

I


APPENDIX E3 Special Earthing

--- ------------ --

/ / --- --- - - ---- --

I /

........

"'

"\

\

Ground Level

I I \ I I \ I

--jf -,f---ll---+- - -1 E

1m 1m

I

I

Une

direction

Additional Rings

I (where nac8880ry)

I -- -- -- -- -- , ------------- v

I t-- --jf ---ll---+- - +--+ .J_ ..-:: ..-- 1 \ I I :::::::

:::::::::-r··-

\ \ I I \ '\ / I \ """'

"- ........

........

/ / I

/ / /

A - Two Standard Eorthings.

--- ------------ --- B - Special Earthing: 1 - 70mm2 stranded copper cond, Jctor.

NOTE

2 - Tower :forth clomp for 70mrrf Cu - Bolt M12. 3 - 70mm stranded copper conductor joint clomp.

In addition to the standard earthing, the other two legs shall hove installed a second standard earthing. All legs shall be interconnected by a ring of 70mm' stranded copper conductor. The earthing connections from tower to the additional earthing shall be specially protected against corrosion up to a point 1 meter below ground by the application of Dense Paste and Dense Tope or similar).

SP-11148 Page E3/1 MAY 2008

.

-


APPENDIX E4 Connection Between Terminal Tower and Substation Earthing System

Ground Level

' ' Substation

f----'- r--1/f------------- --· ·,._ Earthing

(J)--Y '· em

.·::::::I.··

::::::-

:::::: .. I

LEGEND 1 - Tower Earth Clamp for 70mm2 Cu - Bolt M12. 2 - 70mnf Stranded Copper Conductor. 3 - 70mnf Stranded Copper Conductor Joint Clamp.

NOTE Each earth connection shall be connected on different wire of the substation earth mesh.

-- ---------------------------- ·"

I I

SP-11148 Page E4/1 MAY 2008


APPENDIX F1: CONCEPTUAL FOUNDATION DRAWINGS

SP-1114B Page F1-1 May 2008

r "'


APPENDIX F1

Conceptual Foundation Drawings Footings for 132kV and 220kV Overhead Lines

Pad and Chimney Footing for Normal Soil with Plain Concrete Pad (without Undercut)

' '

..... 1>,, cl,

I

"'I Ground level

I "' ' -r

A "T"

A

0

Sectjon A A

I

- -+- - l '

/

) L_

8

a,, . d,

Definition point

""

NOTE

1. 28 days concrete cube strength: min C35. 2. Epoxy coated reinforcement and sulphate resisting cement BS 4027 shall be used where required by soil investigation report. 3. Concrete surfaces will be isolated from contact with backfill by protective paint, cool tar epoxy,

where specified by soil investigation report.

4. Dimensions <Jo, a,. a,. IJo, b,. b,. and do. d,. d, and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.

5. Bottom width shall not be smaller than the top width of the pod.

SP-11148 Page F1/1 MAY 2008


APPENDIX F1 Conceptual Foundation Drawings

Footings for 132kV and 220kV Overhead Lines

Version 2

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/2

j j

I

"

Pad and Chimney Footing for Normal Soil with Reinforced Concrete Pad (with Undercut)

'I> <\,

a,,b,,d,

d7 i

... b,,d,

d7 i

!

Ground leYel 1-- " "'I I<

!

Ground level 1-- " "'I I<

:; :;

-r -r

-r

A "

-- A

a,, b,. <1,

I Definition point

A -r A

0,. b,. <1,

Def10"1 t1'0ln po1'nt

NOTE

I / \

Br /'"" l\ Ts

I B I ;!)

/

Br ;r- \ Ts

I B I ;!)

Sectjon A-A

--+- i

1. 28 days concrete cube strength: min C35. 2. Epoxy coated reinforcement and sulphate resisting cement BS 4027 shall be used where required by soil investigation report. 3. Concrete surfaces will be isolated from contact with backfill by protective paint, coal tar epoxy,


4. Dimensions <Jo, a,, o2, bo. b,, b,, and do. d,, d, end leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shell be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.




Version 2

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/3

-h.

A

,..-..-'!; t , tF.

A +

(

'- r ( )

I ,

Drilled Shaft Footing for Normal Soil Conditions

lJ,

"o',·,"b',·,"<1'.

Gn11.11d IMI .. 1-

Section B B

-r A -r

A c

-" JTs --t-- -t- Ia., bo. d,

I-- B -t-

- -t-

.. p "/' :: I " -,..... CT -.- Tc '-1- -t-

-'--' -t-

Sectjon A-A

Section C C

ag

NOTE



4. Dimensions ao. a,, o2, IJo, b,, 1>,, and do. d,, d, and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.




Version 2

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/4

'\ "' t'

1

Drilled Shaft Footing with Belling in Normal Soil (Vertical)

Tower base definition point

... . !1. . . do

0,, b,, d,

Tower Al

groun

-d le

-vel <

--

tilt

leg slope in •a• direction 100

-=::::::::::::J Tower

definition

Cut off level of concrete

SECTION A-A c

- -

d

NOTE

1. 28 doys concrete cube strength: min C35. 2. Epoxy coated reinforcement and sulphate resisting cement BS 4027 shall be used where required by soil investigation report. 3. Concrete surfaces will be isolated from contact with backfill by protective paint, coal tar epoxy,

where specified by soil investigation report. 4. Dimensions <Jo, o,, o,, . b,, b,, end do. d,, d, ond leg slope shell be listed for control of the instollotion.

All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV end 220kV overhead lines.

I




Drilled Shaft Footing with Belling in Normal Soil (Raked)

® ---------- ----------4


Cut off level of

concrete

" . _ . _

I Tower base

" "

fj. :::::..1

I Log slope in ;'iMJ diroction

_level .

Tower base

definition int

® ©

SECTION A!-Al

NOTE



4. Dimensions ao. a,, a2, bo. b,, b:.. and do. d,, <I, and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.

SP-11148 Page F1/5 MAY 2008


APPENDIX F1


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/6

,

A

Pad and Chimney Footing for 50% Soft Rock with Plain Concrete Pad (with Undercut)

"'·"'· d,

I

Gnuld 1M! r -f I ""

t- '

'-

T T"

c

-:j

-

_.._

A

"

. . d,

Sectjon A-A

I

I Definition point '-I-

I H-

I '---

; r-1--.) '---

\ T I.

- - -·-

! I

B

NOTE



4. Dimensions ao. a,, o2, bo. b,, 1>,, and do. d,, d, and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.


APPENDIX F1


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/7

l.f

1\

(

1\ -'\ v \.. v ·' tF.

,( 1\

/ 1\

1\ v r r-\ v

,

I ::::: .: :::::

Drilled Shaft Footing for 50% Soft Rock

a,. l>z,dz

.J,

I

Ground IMI I I ...

---r- A ---r-

A "

BT l Ts

IIT a,. . d,

.......,._._

;::: -;', ;:::

I d

CT Tc

Section 8-8

'--/---'

Sectjon C-C

Section A-A

"l<"

. .

. .

NOTE



4. Dimensions ao. a,, o2, bo. b,, 1>,, and do. d,, d, and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.


APPENDIX F1


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/8

...n

1- :::J

-n

Rock Anchor Footing in Soft Rock (Suspension Tower)

RAKED MICROPILES

.,, a,. b,. d,

11-,

"'I

t- <

VERTICAL MICROPILES ALTERNATIVE

.,, a,. b,.d,

1

"'I

d IIMII

T

8

TA lr- -n

I 1\ T 0 8

u

Wid level

T

81

TA f:"

1\

; :J_

<

T 0 81

... . d,

8

cl

... . d,

cr Tc 8

Sectjon C-C

cl

0

0 0

_,

Sectjon 8-8 S'et'IQ[] A-A

" L

'I -

"

,., J "

NOTE

Section 8-8

Circular cap shape

Leg slope o· direction '-++- J

Section 81-81

1. 28 days concrete cube strength: min C35. 2. Epoxy coated reinforcement and sulphate resisting cement BS 4027 shall be used where required by soil investigation report. 3. Concrete surfaces will be isolated from contoct with backfill by protective paint, cool tar epoxy,



APPENDIX F1


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/9

4. Dimensions ao. a,, o2, bo. b,, b,, and do. d,, d:1 and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.


APPENDIX F1


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/10

Rock Anchor Footing in Soft Rock (Tension Tower)

RAKED MICROPILES

EI.EYAIIllli

VERTICAL MICROPILES ALTERNATIVE EI.EYAIIllli

T T T 8 8 81

Sedjon B-B

T T c c Sectjon C-C

SedI'QD A-A

/ L"\

/

Seci'Ion 81 -81

NOTE

1. 28 days concrete cube strength: min C35.

Leg slope a· direction Lf+-_J :J

- 2. Epoxy coated reinforcement and sulphate resisting cement BS 4027 shall be used where required by soil investigation report. 3. Concrete surfaces will be isolated from contact with backfill by protective paint, coal tar epoxy,


4. Dimensions eo. a,, a2, . b,, 1>,, and do. d,, d, and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.


APPENDIX F1


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/10

... b

J>.

Rock Anchor Footing in Hard Rock

Ground ,""' TA

leg slope in •a• direction 100

-=::::::::::J

SecfIon A-A

" T T 8 8

II sl

II ll II \l II \l II \l II \l II \l

1!1

NOTE

Sectjon 8-8

1. 28 days concrete cube strength: min C35. 2. Epoxy coated reinforcement and sulphate resisting cement BS 4027 shall be used where required by soil investigation report. 3. Concrete surfaces will be isolated from contact with backfill by protective point, coal tor epoxy,


4. Dimensions ao. a,. a2, bo. b,. !>,. ond do. d,. d:! and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV ond 220kV overhead lines.


APPENDIX F1


Pad and Chimney Footing for Poor Soil with Reinforced Concrete Pad (without Undercut)

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/11

-. • •

a,. b,.d,

a,. b,. d,

"'I Ground level I <

A 1--

c... A c

a,. b,.d,

a,. b,. d,

"'I Ground level <

:: '--

A -. c

'-

'-- a,. . d,

Definition point

'-;>'

!. \

Br 8

",..:'

_...-_., Br

1-- A

... . d, Definition point

'/1

I

8

",..:'

NOTE

Leg slope in "a" direction Lf-'--_j

Definition

Sectjon A A

Sectjon 8 8



4. Dimensions ao. a,, a2, bo. b,, b,, and do. d,, d:! and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.

5. Bottom width shall not be smaller than the top width the pad.


APPENDIX F1


Pad and Chimney Footing for Poor Soil with Reinforced Concrete Pad (without Undercut)

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/12

' - - 1- -f t- 1- - -

' '

' T" T"

a,, ill do

a,, I>,, <I,

' I

a,,

a,, 1>, d,

(1

' I Ground level I<

'

A -r A

0

a,, . d,

Definition point

/ "

Ground level I<

'

A -r A

0

a,, . d,

Definition point

/

Br Ts Br Ts

B ,..;

B ,..;

Sectjon A A

--+I

-- i

I

Sectjon B B

'

'

'

NOTE



4. Dimensions ao. a,, a2, bo. b,, b,, and do. d,, d:! and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.

5. Bottom width shall not be smaller than the top width the pad.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page F1/13


APPENDIX F1


Piled Foundation in Poor Soil (Vertical Pile)

<

"'· b,, d, ""' bo. <!,


;': d level Al

'\ "' 1'

• c :n =

SECTION A-A

c

-

-

NOTE

d I

1. 28 days concrete cube strength: min C35. 2. Epoxy coated reinforcement and sulphate resisting cement BS 4027 shall be used where required by soil investigation report. 3. Concrete surfaces will be isolated from contact with backfill by protective paint, cool tar epoxy,


4. Dimensions <Jo, a,. a2, bo. b,. !>,. and do. d,. d:! and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.


APPENDIX F1


Piled Foundation in Poor Soil (Raked Pile)

0 ®

Pile center at /

ground/platform level


® ©

SECTION Al-AI

NOTE



4. Dimensions ao. a,. a2, bo. b,. !>,. and do. d,. d:! and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.

SP-11148 Page F1/14 MAY 2008

I

- 1/1""\ r-+- 1\.. I

-

'

I

-

r /I'\

r-;..1

I

- VI> t-+- 1\..J......I

-

'

+

-----T- =r

-

-


APPENDIX F1


Special Piled Foundations in Submerged Soil Conditions (Subkha)

Section A-A

Tower base

definition point 0 I

. ""' - - -

I

Section B-B

ao. bo. do a2, . d2

Tower base

definition point

0-

. . - -...., r---

<(

Ill\\\

-

Ill\\\

<( Final level of fill

----"'--

. . . M . . TA Actual level of

subkh.a

Water

IHY.\ I Ill\\\

IW1- I--- I--- I--- I----

B

IH\\\ /IN.\

- - --- I--

B B B

.(at tower center)

I

I -t:: -

I -t:: -

iS

:::::j:- " :::: -· ::--

I

:::- iS

d :::-- .--- :::-

I I

I I I Tnn nf hodmok level

' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '

Section A-A

0 r lc:

' /

-r-__,Bisectrice ,. oirecbon

Ill

Section B-B

0

0

NOTE

Leg slope in "a" direction 100

<:::::::::::J Tower base

definition point



4. Dimensions a0, a1, a2, ba, b,, b2, and d0, d1, d2 and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.

SP-11148 Page F1/15 MAY 2008

fjj.I

1

' ,




Special Footing on Micropiles for Submerged Soil Conditions

Sectjon 8-8

Sectjoo A-A

-;-

"""''' bz,d,

ry

"'I • B 1/ -;- I<

L AIIMI B

• Submerged '- .Jil: loose soil --- -- .Jil:

--- /'- - -=- - c!

Submerged

T hard soil E

' ' T E

-= T-=

v

T a,, b,, <\

T

B c

¥ : -

- -

d

_,s .lil..o

Sectjon E-E

H-

NOTE



4. Dimensions <Jo, a,. a2, bo. b,. !>,. and do. d,. d:! and leg slope shall be listed for control of the installation. All dimensions shall be specified on detailed drawings of the foundations for 132kV and 220kV overhead lines.

SP-11148 Page F1/16 MAY 2008


SP-1114B Page F2-1 May 2008

Appendix F2

ASSUMED SOIL CHARACTERISTICS FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN

Foundation Design Data Unit

a) Hard

rock

Soil Category

b) Soft c) Normal

rock soil

d) Poor

soil

Ultimate bearing capacity under ultimate

loading

kN/m² 1500 1000 400 200

Frustum angle for uplift resistance under

ultimate loading

Degrees

to vertical

- - 30 20

Soil density kg/m³ 2000 1900 1600 1500

Concrete density (Grade C35) kg/m³ 2340 2340 2340 2340

Ultimate shear between rock and foundation

concrete

kN/m² 100 60 - -

Cohesion (of soil) kN/m² - - 70 50

Adhesion between galvanised steel stub and

concrete

N/mm² 1 1 1 1

Ultimate lateral earth pressure under

ultimate loadings

kN/m² 600 390 390 150

Minimum portion of stub load to be taken by

%

50

50

50

50

cleats in:

− Compression

− Uplift % 100 100 100 100


SP-1114B Page C1-1 May 2008

Appendix C1

TYPES OF LINE CONDUCTORS AND SHIELDWIRE


Item Description Units Details

ELM YEW Shieldwire

1. Nominal aluminium area of conductor mm² 200 400 -

2. Type of conductor AAAC AAAC

Alumini

um

Alloy

Conductor

Alu Clad

Steel Reinf.

3. Total cross-section area mm² 211 479 -

4. Overall diameter mm 18.8 28.42 -

5. Number and diameter of aluminium

strands

6. Lay for Aluminium strands:

No/mm 19 x 3.76 37 x 4.06 -

Inner layer mm

Middle layer mm

Outer layer mm

7. Lay of stranding of the conductor

outermost layer

- Right hand Right hand Right hand

8. Guaranteed ultimate Breaking load N 59100 134200 -

9. Aluminium individual wires before

stranding

– Tensile breaking stress

– Elongation on 250mm length on

breaking

N/mm²

%

10. Equivalent modulus of elasticity (final) N/mm²

11. Equivalent co-efficient of linear expansion per °C 23 x 10-6 23 x 10-6

-

12. Creep prediction for 10 years (equivalent °C in temperature shift) 13. Maximum calculated DC resistance per

km at 20oC

ohms 0.1568 0.06908 -

14. Continuous Current Rating at 90°C A -

conductor temperature and 0.5m/s wind 15. Unit weight conductor kg/m 0.58 1.319 -

16. Standard length of conductor on drum m

17. Weight of complete drum plus conductor kg

18. Diameter of drum mm

* The Shieldwire shall be designed as to withstand a short-circuit current of 25kA

for 1 second.


Appendix O1

COMPOSITE GROUNDWIRE PARTICULARS


SP-1114B Page O1-1 May 2008

Item Description Units Required Guaranteed

1. Applicable standards

2. Manufacturer

3. Country of Manufacture

4. Type tests carried out in the year

5. Laboratory/Country

6. First commercial operation of the offered cable

7. Nominal area of conductor mm²

8. Overall diameter mm

9. Total cross-sectional area mm²

10. Type of material, number and diameter of

individual strands

- Inner layer

- Outer layer Aluminium Alloy

11. Lay of wires

– Inner layer mm

– Outer layer mm

12. Creep prediction for 10 years (temperature shift) °C

13. Guaranteed ultimate breaking load daN

14. Equivalent modulus of elasticity (final) daN/ mm²

15. Equivalent coefficient of linear expansion °C-1

16. Maximum crush force kg/mm

17. Minimum bending radius mm

18. Maximum calculated DC resistance per km at Ω 20°C

19. Short circuit rating (for one second) kA 25

20. Lightning withstand according to IEC 60794-4-1 yes

21. Hollow aluminium extruded tube yes/no

21.1. minimum thickness of the hollow aluminium

tube wall

mm 1.2

21.2. hollow aluminum tube diameter mm

21.3. number of buffers inside the hollow tube (min) 4

21.4. the tube is filled with water blocking and

hydrogen absorbent gel (around buffer tubes)

yes


Appendix O1

COMPOSITE GROUNDWIRE PARTICULARS




22. 22.1.

22.2.

22.3.

22.4.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

Stainless Steel Tube Cladded Aluminium

Structure (SSTS Claded A1)

minimum thickness of steel tube

steel tube diameter

number of buffers inside the tube (min)

the tube is filled with water blocking gel

(around buffer tubes)

Number of optical fibres

Weight of complete conductor per meter

Standard length of conductor on drum

Drum diameter

Drum material

mm

mm

Nos.

kg/m

m

mm

yes/no

1

yes

28. Drum gross weight kg


Appendix O2

PARTICULARS OF THE OPTICAL FIBERS



Item Parameter Units Required Guaranteed

1. Applicable standards

2. Manufacturer

3. Country of Manufacture

4. Operating wavelength mm 1310 and 1550

5. Cut-off wavelength nm 1150-1285

Fibre Type and Arrangement

6. Type/mode standard single

mode

7. Number of fibres per buffer tube (max.) no. 8

8. Total number of optical fibres no. 16

9. Buffer tube is made of polybuthylen therephthalate yes

10. Buffer tubes are in hollow aluminium extruded tube yes/no

11. Buffer tubes are in Stainless Steel Tube Cladded Aluminum yes/no

Structure

12. Minimum thickness of buffer tube wall mm 0.25

13. Buffer tubes are color coded yes

14. Buffer tubes are filled with water blocking jelly yes

15. Gel dripping temperature higher than 85 degC yes

Optical performances of Cable for G.625 fibers

16. Attenuation variation with wavelength dB/km < 0.1

(1285-1330 nm)

17. Attenuation at water peak dB/km ≤ 2.1

18. Attenuation with bending (100 turns on a 75 mm diameter dB ≤ 0.1 at 1550 nm

mandrel)

19. Attenuation coefficient at 1310 nm dB/km ≤ 0.38

20. Attenuation coefficient at 1550 nm dB/km ≤ 0.25

21. Optical point discontinuities at 1310 and 1550 nm dB < 0.1

22. Chromatic dispersion between 1285 and 1330 nm ps/nm·km ≤ 3.5

23. Chromatic dispersion at 1550 nm ps/nm·km ≤ 18

24. Cable cutoff wavelength nm ≤ 1260

25. PMD Coefficient ps/(km)1/2

≤ 0.5

Fiber Geometry and Performance Requirements for

G.652 fiber

26. Mode field diameter at 1310 nm (Peterman II definition) µm 9.3±0.5

27. Mode field concentricity error µm ≤ 1.0

28. Cladding diameter µm 125±2

29. Cladding non-circularity - ≤ 2%


Appendix O2

PARTICULARS OF THE OPTICAL FIBERS



Item Parameter Units Required Guaranteed

30. Coating diameter µm 245±10

31. Proof test - 1% strain

(equivalent to 0.7

GN/m2)

Environmental Performance of Cable

32. Operating Temperature ºC -20 to +70

33. Allowable change in attenuation at temperature extremes dB/km ≤ 0.05

34. Installation Temperature ºC -20 to +55

35. Storage Temperature ºC -20 to +70

Other characteristics

36. Effective group index of refraction at 1310 nm -


38. Primary coating material -

39. Secondary coating material -

40. Material of central strength member -

41. Minimum diameter of central strength member -

Other characteristics



44. Primary coating material -

45. Secondary coating material -

46. Fiber identification method -

47. Material of central strength member -

48. Minimum diameter of central strength member -

49. Fiber support / buffering method -

50. Optical component armoring method -


Appendix O3

ACCESSORIES FOR COMPOSITE GROUNDWIRE




1. Joint Boxes

-

Stainless steel

− Manufacturer

− Material -

min. grade

ANSI 316 or

cast aluminium

− OPGW-OPGW (FOC) splicing no. - 16

− Cable entry direction - From bottom

− Enclosure protection - IP55W

− Height x Width x Depth mm

2. Suspension Clamp

– Type

– Weight

-

kg

Armour Grip

Type

3. Tension Clamp

– Type

– Weight

-

kg

Helical

preformed type

4. Vibration Damper

Stockbridge

4.1. Type -

4.2. Weight kg

4.3. Fitting distance from clamp mouth: kg

− first damper for spans up to … mm

− second damper for spans from … to … mm

4.4. Minimum axial slipping force kN

4.5. Minimum axial force on damper weight for kN

detachment

4.6. Stranding of messenger cable No. 19

4.7. Armour rod fitted - Yes

5. Earth bond conductor

– Aluminium area

– Overall diameter

– Maximum calculated DC resistance per km at

20°C

mm²

mm

Ω

100


APPENDIX 04

SP-11148 MAY 2D08 Page 04/1

8 ... (Vibration Damper) 7 1 Parallel Groove Clamp 6 1 Bonding with Connector 5 1 Shackle 4 1 Clevis Eye Twisted 3 1 Armour Grip Clamp 2 1 Neoprene Insert 1 1 Armour Rods N:;S

Item Qty Description Drawing No.

OPGW Suspension Set Arrangement

Additional Armor Rod for 2nd and

3rd damper (if any)

OPGW

II

II

\ II

\ II

\ 7 II I

\ I \ I

\ I

II II II II

I II I I I

PARALLEL GROOVE CLAMP DETAIL

SP-11148 MAY 2D08 Page 04/2


APPENDIX 04

OPGW Tension Set Arrangement

for Towers without Joint Box

Additional Armor Rod for 2nd and 3rd damper if any)

8 ... Vibration Damper) 7 Graundwire Bracket 6 Armor Rod 5 Performed Dead End 4 Thimble 3 Extension Unk 2 Shackle 1 Shackle



APPENDIX 04

OPGW Tension Set Arrangement

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 04/3

10 ... (Tower Clam ) 9 ... (Vibration Damper 8 Connector 7 Parallel Groove Clamp 6 Armor Rod 5 Performed Dead End 4 Thimble 3 Extension Unk 2 Shackle 1 Shackle


for Towers with Joint Box

Additional Armor Rod for 2nd and 3rd damper (if any)

9 9

7

8 TOWER CLAMP DETAIL

10 PARALLEL GROOVE CLAMP DErAIL

TOWER MAIN LEG

II II

II II

--lJ


APPENDIX 04 Connection of OPGW to Joint Box

A

TOWER CLAMP DETAIL

DETAIL "B"

Tower Clamp

6

Tower Clam

8

c

DETAIL "A" Additional Armor Rod

DET.oJL "C" RXING OF JOINT BOX

TO THE TOWER MAIN MEMBER

Page 04/4 MAY 2008


Appendix I1

DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS OF SILICONE RUBBER INSULATORS

(132 & 220 kV)


Item Description Required Guaranteed

1. Manufacturer’s name

2. Core material

3. Housing and sheds material

4. Thickness of housing [mm] > 3mm

5. End fitting material

6. Interface to metal end fittings High

Temperature

Vulcanization

7. Average coating thickness of fittings [μm] 125

8. Which standard type test reports comply

SP-1114B Page I1-1 May 2008


Appendix I2

CLASSES OF SILICON RUBBER INSULATOR UNITS



132 kV Insulators 220 kV Insulators

1. Specified Mechanical Load (Actual)

Single & Twin AAAC ELM per Phase

and Single AAAC YEW per Phase

Twin AAAC YEW per

Phase

Single AAAC YEW per Phase Twin AAAC YEW per

Phase

acc. to ANSI C29.11-1989 [kN] 80 120 230 230 320 120 160 230 230 320

2. Nominal Creepage Distance [mm] 5800 5800 5800 5800 5800 9800 9800 9800 9800 9800

3. Actual Creepage Distance [mm]

4. Part Number

5. Drawing Number

6. Sheds Spacing [mm]

7. Nominal Total Length [mm]

8. Number of Sheds

9. Diameter of Sheds

10. Grading Ring Material - - - - - Tore in

Aluminium

Tore in

Aluminium

Tore in

Aluminium

Tore in

Aluminium

Tore in

Aluminium

11. Tore Diameter [mm] - - - - -

12. Ring Diameter [mm] - - - - -

13. Net Weight per Insulator Rod [kg]



Appendix I3

INSULATOR TEST REQUIREMENTS


Test

No.

Test Requirements Test

Standard

Test

Classification

1 Visual Examination

Visual examination and identification of the insulator R

2 Surface Characteristics of the insulators

2.1 Hydrophobicity classification STRI Guide 92/1 T

2.2 Zinc coating on the end fittings IEC 60 383-1 S

3 Electrical Characteristics of the Insulators

3.1 Dry lightning impulse voltage test IEC 60060-1, 61109,

60383

T

3.2 Wet Power Frequency Voltage Test IEC 60 060-1 61109,

60383

T

3.3 Corona Voltage Onset Test IEC 60060-1 & 61109 T

3.4 Wet Switching Impulse withstand voltage test IEC 61109, 60383 T

3.5 Dry power frequency voltage test IEC 611094 D

3.6 Steep-front impulse voltage test IEC 61109 D

3.7 Voltage test IEC 61109 D

4 Internal Integrity of the Insulators

4.1 Sealing test of the joint between housing and end

fittings and ultimate tensile rupture test.

IEC 61 109/

ISO3452

S

4.2 Sudden load release test IEC 61109 D

4.3 Thermal mechanical test IEC 61109 D

4.4 Water immersion test IEC 61109 D

4.5 Dye penetration test IEC 61109 D

4.6 Water diffusion test IEC 61109 D

5 Mechanical Characteristics of the Insulators

5.1 Verification of the SML IEC 61109 R

5.2 Verification of dimensions IEC 61109 S

5.3 Verification of the locking system IEC 61109 S

5.4 Mechanical load test/load-time test IEC 61109 D, T

6 Long duration ageing test 5000 hours ageing test

under the operating voltage

IEC 61109 D

Symbols R - Routine tests

S - Sample tests T - Type tests D - Design tests


Specificotion of Design of 132 & 220 kV Overhead Power Unes on Lattice STEEL TOWERS Version 2

APPENDIX 14

Insulator Sets for 132kV Single AMC ELM Per Phase Normal Suspension Set

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 14/1

8 1 Armour Rod 7 1 Shackle 6 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16Amm) 3 1 Une End Arcing Ring 2 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16mm) 1 1 Suspension Clamp


NOTES: 0 - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: BDkN N

- t.tinimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec x - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all mtings: 450kV "E - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 400kV

- Dry impulse withstand vo age (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fittings: 735kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16Amm - AJI dimensions are in mm

2 - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specffied by the manufacturer.

8

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 14/2

Version 2 Specificotion of Design of 132 & 220 kV Overhead Power Unes on Lattice STEEL TOWERS

APPENDIX 14

Insulator Sets for 132kV Single AMC ELM Per Phase

Heavy Suspension Set

12 1 Anmor Rod 11 1 Shackle 10 1 Clevis Joint 9 1 Yoke Plate 8 2 Boll Clevis (Coupling 16Amm) 7 2 Earth End Arcing Ring 6 2 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16A mm) 5 2 Une End Arcing Ring

"'

- · cu

,

11 I

-10

' -9 ,..

_, r- - '

'I

'-

400 '

-a

-7 I ( (( ;:>) NOTES:

"c' - Minimum mechanical foiling load of complete insulator set: 2x80kN ..., c- ..., c- - ,_

> " - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 450kV

?- ?- .5"::! "'C - - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec

- Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 400kV 0

.., ?- ?- c c - Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete :'5

0

"' " " with all flltings: 735kV

"E - r- - r- - Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV

" -' -=

c - Coupling type & size: 8&S-16A mm

-= -= 6

""" """

- """ " - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm

- All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer

' I · 5 o? I - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

'

4

c...._ ,k, "'

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 14/3


APPENDIX 14

Insulator Sets for 132kV Single AMC ELM Per Phase


"111' -3 II-

-2

1 1

I

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 14/4

Version 2 Specification of Design of 132 & 220 kV Overhead Power Unes on Lattice STEEL TOWERS

APPENDIX 14

Insulator Sets for 132kV Single AMC ELM Per Phase Normal Tension Set

10 1 Compression Oead End Clamp 9 1 Sog Adjuster (300mm Adj. Range, 12mm Increment 8 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 7 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16A mm) 5 1 Une End Arcing Ring 4 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle


1---------------------145 1150 Lift of arcing device

over line end shed unit

r In In n. In In In

=-"" IY I · I I IY

T

NOTES:

Max: · Min:

Max: : Min: I '

- M1"m. mum mec amcalf a11ngloa 0f compe e msuIator set: BOkN

- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fitlings: 4DOkV

- Dry impulse withstand vo age (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fittings: 73SkV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type &: size: B&:S-16A mm

- Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 14/5


APPENDIX 14

Insulator Sets for 132kV Single AMC ELM Per Phase Upright Light Duty Tension Set

9 1 Compression Deod End Clamp 8 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 7 1 Une End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16A mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16A mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle


r--------------------------------- 1150

Uft of arcing device over line end shed unit

--------

8 9

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 80kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 45DkV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fitlings: 4DOkV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16A mm

- Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 14/6


APPENDIX 14 Insulator Sets for 132kV Single AMC ELM Per Phase

Inverted Light Duty Tension Set

10 1 Compression Dead End Clomp 9 1 Turnbuckle (150mm Adjustable Range) 8 1 Boll Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 7 1 Une End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S-16A mm) 5 1 Adjustable Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16 mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle


650-1050

9

-= - lhhftl l!hftlll

illiiiI 1 1i1i1i1 T

- - - - - -

Ma ; Min:

Max: ; Min: I I

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical foiling load of complete insulator set: 80kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz wahstond of insulator set complete with all fillings: 290-440kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete wah all fittings: 270-370kV

- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fillings: 475-720kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S- 16A mm

- Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer

- Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 14/7

Specificotion of Design of 132 & 220 kV Overhead Power Unes on Lattice STEEL TOWERS Version 2

APPENDIX 14

Insulator Sets for 132kV Single AMC ELM Per Phase Jumper Suspension Set

0

+----·tft--7

6

5

0

0..., "' 4

"x' "E

3

2

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: BOkN

- t.tinimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all mtings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 400kV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16Amm - AJI dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specffied by the manufacturer.

8 1 Counterweight 50kg (total) 7 1 Shackle 6 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16Amm) 3 1 Une End Arcing Ring 2 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16mm) 1 1 Suspension Clamp



APPENDIX 15

Insulator Sets for 132kV Twin MAC ELM Per Phase Normal Suspension Set

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 15 /1

10 2 Armour Rod 9 1 Shackle 8 1 Boll Eye (Coupling 16mm) 7 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&:S 16A mm) 5 1 Une End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Suspension Clomp

em Qty Description Drawing No.

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical foiling load of complete insulator set 120kN

- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 400kV

- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fittings: 735kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type &: size: B&:S-16A mm - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

10


APPENDIX 15

Insulator Sets for 132kV Twin MAC ELM Per Phase Heavy Suspension Set

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 15/2

12 11

2 1

Armor Rod Shackle

10 1 Clevis Joint 9 1 Yoke Plate 8 2 Boll Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 7 2 Earth End Arcing Ring

Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16A mm)

Une End Arcing Ring 6

5

2

2

4 2 Socket Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Suspension Clomp

Item Q ty Description Drawing No.

- - - ·i

"' v

7 I

-

-11 I

-10

r- 9 It

-a '; I

400

- F- •'=-

--= 1=- ::)) --= ::>)

NOTES:

"c' F- F- F- F- 2- F- m

- Minimum mechanical foiling load of complete insulator set: 2x120kN

- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 400kV

:..5. 2- 2- 0 2- c c - Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete

" 1"' ' '

1"'

· Cl)

N c v with all flltings: 735kV c 1"' c - Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV

E ""' 1:-- ""' 1:-- 6 ""' 1:-- '5 - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm

"-":" "-":" -"":" - Coupling type & size: 8&S-16A mm - All dimensions are in mm.

""" """ -o """ - Weight of complete set: to

be specified by the manufacturer

I "

1:f I '

A I

' 0

4

-3 4


•2

...... 1

400

12

.!1 il!o.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 15/3


APPENDIX 15

Insulator Sets for 132kV Twin MAC ELM Per Phase

12 2 Compression De od End Clamp

Omm Adj. Ronge, 12mm

11 2 Sog Adjuster (JO Increment 10 2 Shackle 9 1 Yoke 8 2 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 7 1 Une End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle


Normal Tension Set

--------------------------------

Lift of arcing device aver line end shad unit

8 12

--------

--------

Max: ; Min:

Max: ; Min:

NOTES:

- Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 160kN

- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all flltings: 4DOkV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type &: size: B&:S-20 mm

- Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 15/4


APPENDIX 15


11 2 Compression Dead End Clamp 10 2 Shackle 9 Yoke 8 Socket Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 7 Une End Arcing Ring 6 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S-16A mm) 5 Earth End Arcing Ring

2 Shackle

1 Shackle Item Qty Description Drawing No.

Upright Light Duty Tension Set

-------------------------------- 1150

Lift. of arcing device

over fine end shed unit

- -----

11

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 120kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fitlings: 4DOkV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16A mm - Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions are in mm.

- Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 15/5


APPENDIX 15


12 2 Compression Dead End Clamp 11 2 Turnbuckle (150mm Adjustable Range) 10 2 Shackle 9 1 Yoke 8 1 Ball Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 7 1 Uno End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S-16Amm) 5 1 Adjustable Earth End Ring 4 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle



650-1050

,-

-= - -

11hhh lihhl

'Jil'i' I'Pili

8,-

-

9 10

..._

- - - - - -

0

- - - - - -

Max: ; Min: l Max: ; Min: I

I

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 120kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz wahstand of insulator set complete with all filtings: 290-4-40kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete wah all fittings: 270-370kV

- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all filtings: 475-720kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16A mm



SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 15/6


APPENDIX 15


Jumper Suspension Set

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 80kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz wtthstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete wtth all fittings: 400kV

- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fillings: 735kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16A mm - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

10

10 1 Counterweight 50kg (total) 9 1 Shackle 8 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 7 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16A mm) 5 1 Une End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Suspension Clamp



APPENDIX 16

Insulator Sets for 132kV Single MAC Yf'N Per Phase Normal Suspension Set

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 16 /1

8 1 Armour Rod 7 1 Shackle 6 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16Amm) 3 1 Une End Arcing Ring 2 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16mm) 1 1 Suspension Clamp


+-----lr--7

6

5

4

3

2


- t.tinimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all mtings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 400kV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16Amm

- AJI dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specffied by the manufacturer.

8 .,


APPENDIX 16 Insulator Sets for 132kV Single MAC Yf'N Per Phase


SP-11148 Page 16/2 MAY 2008

12 1 Armor Rod 11 1 Shackle 10 1 Clevis Joint 9 1 Yoke Plate 8 2 Boll Clevis (Coupling 16Amm) 7 2 Earth End Arcing Ring 6 2 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16A mm) 5 2 Une End Arcing Ring 4 2 Socket Clevis (Coupling 16A mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Suspension Clomp


- - -

5

r- '

'I F-

-11

-10

9 It -

' 400 '

(-( = 8

7 ::>)

'; •'=-

I

NOTES:

F- F-

F- 2- F- F-

- Minimum mechanical foiling load of complete insulator set: 2x80kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 400kV

2- 2-

"c

"" 1"'

"" 1"'

;::

2-

' 1"'

- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all flltings: 735kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV

E i:"' i:"' 6 "" i:"' - Nominal creepage distance: 58DOmm

- Coupling type & size: 8&S-16Amm

""' """ ""' """ ""' """ I

- All dimensions are in mm.


' I " ' 0

4

3 4

12

.!1 il!o.

SP-11148 Page 16/3 MAY 2008


APPENDIX 16

Insulator Sets for 132kV Single MAC Yf'N Per Phase Normal Tension Set

10 1 Compression Dead End Clamp 9 1 Sag Adjuster (300mm Adj. Range, 12mm Increment 8 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 7 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 1 Une End Arcing Ring 4 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle


1150


10

lnlnln lnlnln - - - - - -

NOTES:

Max: ; Min:

Max: : Min:

I - M1"m. mum mec amcalf a11ngloa 0f compe e msuIator set: 230kN

- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fitlings: 400kV

- Dry impulse withstand vo oge (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fittings: 735kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type &: size: B&:S-20mm

- Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 Page 16/4 MAY 2008


APPENDIX 16

Insulator Sets for 132kV Single MAC Yf'N Per Phase Upright Light Duty Tension Set

9 1 Compression Dead End Clamp 8 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 7 1 Une End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16A mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16A mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle


---------------------------------- 1150

Uft of crcing device over line end shed unit

0- ----------

8 9



- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16A mm - Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions are in mm.


SP-11148 Page 16/5 MAY 2008



10 1 Compression Dead End Clomp 9 1 Turnbuckle (150mm Adjustable Range) 8 1 Ball Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 7 1 Uno End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S-16A mm) 5 1 Adjustable Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16 mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle



650-1050

0

8 9 10

--=-=--=-=-=----=- -

Max: Min:

Uax: ; Min:

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: BOkN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz wahstond of insulator set complete with all filtings: 290-4-40kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete wah all fittings: 270-370kV

- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all filtings: 475-720kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16A mm



SP-11148 Page 16/6 MAY 2008




+----·tft--7

6

5

0

0 "' 4

"' 0"


- t.tinimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all mtings: 450kV

- Dry impulse withstand vo age (1.2/50) of insulator set complete

E 3 with all fittings: 735kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16Amm - AJI dimensions are in mm

2 - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specffied by the manufacturer.

8 1 Counterweight 50kg (total) 7 1 Shackle 6 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16Amm) 3 1 Une End Arcing Ring 2 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16mm) 1 1 Suspension Clamp



APPENDIX 17 Insulator Sets for 132kV Twin AAAC YEW Per Phase

Normal Suspension Set

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 17 /1

10 2 Armour Rod 9 1 Shackle 8 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 20mm) 7 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 1 Une End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Suspension Clamp


NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 230kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec

- Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 400kV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

400


APPENDIX 17

Insulator Sets for 132kV Twin AAAC YEW Per Phase Heavy Suspension Set

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 17/2

.---T----·a_ ,,

+-------1=------10

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical foiling load of complete insulator set: 2x230kN



- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm - All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

12 2 Armor Rod 11 1 Shackle 10 1 Clevis Joint 9 1 Yoke Plate 8 2 Boll Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 7 2 Earth End Arcing Ring 6 2 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 2 Une End Arcing Ring 4 2 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Suspension Clomp


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 17/3


APPENDIX 17

Insulator Sets for 132kV Twin AAAC YEW Per Phase

t.lax: ; Min:

Max: ; Min:

12 2 Compression Oeod End Clamp 11 2 Sog Adjuster (300mm Adj. Ronge, 12mm Increment 10 2 Shackle 9 1 Yoke 8 2 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 7 2 Une End Arcing Ring 6 2 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 2 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 2 Ball Eye (Coupling 20mm) 3 2 Adjustable Extension Unk (as required) 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Shackle


Normal Tension Set

------------ W=' "---- ;=Min '--------------

1150

12

-=.====-

--------

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 2x320kN

- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz wtthstand of insulator set complete wtth all fittings: 400kV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm - Adjustable range item 3 is of 100 to BOOmm; number of extension links

per branch could be tram 0 to 3 according to line angle and crassann shape. - a - Une Deviation Angle - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer

Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 17/4


APPENDIX 17


11 2 Compression Dead End Clamp 10 2 Shackle 9 Yoke 8 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 7 Une End Arcing Ring 6 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 Earth End Arcing Ring

2 Shackle

1 Shackle Item Qty Description Drawing No.


---------------------------- 1150


11



- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm - Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions are in mm.


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 17/5


APPENDIX 17


12 2 Compression Oead End Clamp 11 2 Turnbuckle (150mm Adjustable Range) 10 2 Shackle 9 1 Yoke 8 1 Ball Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 7 1 Uno End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 1 Adjustable Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle



650-1050

- --------

11 12

--------

Max: Min:

Max: ; Min:

--------

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 230kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Ory 1-minute 50Hz wahstand of insulator set complete with all filtings: 290-4-40kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete wah all fittings: 270-370kV

- Ory impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all filtings: 475-720kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm



SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 17/6


APPENDIX 17


10 1 Counterweight 50kg (total) 9 1 Shackle 8 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 20mm) 7 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 1 Une End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Suspension Clamp


> Eo-

0 "'

-= =

'


+----M---9 D

8

[:--

C<: ::>) 7

" ."'0

-",-"0'

0 E- "'""

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 230kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec

0... 6 "" i · CP

-0

="

- Dry 1-minute 50Hz wtthstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 450kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete wtth all fittings: 400kV

"x' 0

E

c 0

:=-

5 :=- ';f/


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <50 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 5800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

4

3

2 '

200

l!ll._

Version 2 Specification of Design of 132 & 22D kV Overhead Power Unes on Lattice STEEL TOWERS

APPENDIX 18

Insulator Sets for 220kV Single MAC Yf'N Per Phase

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 18 /1

9 1 Armour Rod 8 1 Shackle 7 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 6 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 5 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16Amm) 4 1 Corona Ring 3 1 Uno End Arcing Ring 2 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16mm) 1 1 Suspension Clamp


"'

-c

- 0


6

·c: =>

-"' ""0

> W..c

"' 0">-.:J

0 c c

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 120kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec 0,.._ 0 I "(3 "'

,...., 0 ---·· "' [

··--- c

"c'

- Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all flltings: 58DkV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 460kV

x 5 ---·· ··--- -0 :.= - Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete c E

:.:J

4

3

2

">

'

with all filtings: 1050kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16Amm - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

9


APPENDIX 18


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 18/2

13 1 Armor Rod 12 1 Shackle 11 1 Clevis Joint 10 1 Yoke Plate 9 2 Ball Clevis Coupling 16mm) 8 2 Earth End Arcing Ring 7 2 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16A mm) 6 2 Corona Ring 5 2 Une End Arcing Ring 4 2 Socket Clevis (Coupling 16mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Suspension Clamp

Item Qty Description Drowing No.

"0

" "

-

>

-3

-2

-12

11

1-


K--. -10

k- : ""'?.-> - -9

-

cc - r-

0

' 450

::>) cc

- -

- :-;

8

::>)

0

""'

."""'"

>"-"

·" "

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 2x120kN

- Minimum short circuit roting: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 580kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 460kV

with all fillings: 1050kV

".,.', --- - . --- --· 0 - Maximum RIV at 1000kHz BS 137-2): <100 pV

x ----r LT·-·- ----r '-<--·- E

"' " "

7 0

- Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16Amm - All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer

,_ ,J

,_ I -5

6

"...'.

J

h f--

[·

!=I

= ' 4

13


APPENDIX 18


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 18/3

11 1 Compression Dead End Clamp 10 1 Sag Adjuster (300mm Adj. Range, 12mm Increment) 9 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 20mm) 8 1 Une End Arcing Ring 7 1 Corona Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle


Normal Tension Set

Max: ; Min: 45

L 1900

5

Lift of arcing device over line end shed unit

••••

11

Max:

;

Min:

Max: :k I I

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 230kN

- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 580kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 460kV



- Clevis Tongue length (L) according to entry angle and crossanm shape. - All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 18/4


APPENDIX 18


10 1 Compression Dead End Clamp 9 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16mm) 8 1 Une End Arcing Ring 7 1 Corona Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&:S 16A mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle



45

L 1900

Lift of arcing device over line end shed unit

0

r n n In

In n In

8 9

h

T -==c ===-====-===- r-

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 120kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 580kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all flltings: 460kV

- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fittings: 1050kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type &: size: B&:S-16Amm - Length (L) at Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions ore in mm.

- Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: ta be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 18/5


APPENDIX 18


11 1 Compression Dead End Clamp 10 1 Turnbuckle (150mm Adjustable Range) 9 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 8 1 Une End Arcing Ring 7 1 Corona Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&:S-16A mm) 5 1 Adjustable Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle


lJ -


45

1200-1800

5 9 10

"""' - -

1\ llil ilI

-il

,.....

- - - - - - -

rr I' Ir IU Iu T

I-

NOTES:

Max: : Min:

Max: ; Min: I '

- Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 120kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 38D-565kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 280-42DkV

- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fillings: 680-1025kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type & size: B&:S-16Amm



SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 18/6


APPENDIX 18


9 1 Counterweight 50kg 8 1 Shackle 7 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 16mm) 6 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 5 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 16Amm) 4 1 Corona Ring 3 1 Une End Arcing Ring 2 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 16mm) 1 1 Suspension Clamp


-=

----8

7

6


0 0

0 "' 0

x c E

---·· t ··---

5 -··-- t --··-

4

3

-"""C

>a>..c: "0 "'

-" "Q.)

c "

0 " "


- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with oil flltings: 580kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 460kV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-16Amm - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

2

j

9


APPENDIX 19


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 19 /1

11 2 Armour Rod 10 1 Shackle 9 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 20mm) 8 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 7 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 6 1 Corona Ring 5 1 Une End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Suspension Clamp


"'

- "' 0

>


(,.-----10

9

8

·o:

-"' -"c >"'.."c'

-c "' 0 "c '"c

"(j

0 0 L

0 "' " "c'

x "'



- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 pV

<Xl 7 - :.= L

with all flltings: 1050kV

"E :.:::; 0

6

5

4

3

2

- Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type & size: 8&S-20mm - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

11

450


APPENDIX 19


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 19/2

13 2 Armor Rod 12 1 Shackle 11 1 Clevis Joint 10 1 Yoke Plate 9 2 Ball Clevis Coupling 20mm) 8 2 Earth End Arcing Ring 7 2 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 6 2 Corona Ring 5 2 Une End Arcing Ring 4 2 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Suspension Clamp

Item Qty Description Drowing No.

- 1-

6

I

I

!t

-12

-11

t- -10


i -;; 1:1. -9

r- I r-

450

8

cc ;;?>

0

0 8

x "' 0 E

7

] L.., .r 5

r [

I 4

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 2x230kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 580kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 460kV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz BS 137-2): <100 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm - All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

'\\ ! 3

2

13

-..;;., -..;;.,

450

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 19/3


APPENDIX 19


13 2 Compression Dead End Clamp 12 2 Sag Adjuster 300mm Adj. Range, 12mm Increment) 11 2 Shackle 10 1 Yoke 9 2 Socket Clevis Coupling 20mm) 8 2 Une End Arcing Ring 7 2 Corona Ring 6 2 Silicone Rubber Insulator B&S 20mm) 5 2 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 2 Ball Eye Coupling 20mm) 3 2 Adjustable Extension Unk As required) 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Shackle


t r-

Normal Tension Set

1'- -I

r -· ... - -

-

n In n ln. n In

' I' y I' ' I'

'T -;

- - -

... - o-iE-:: - -

_....

t n In n

ln. n In

1'-

- --1- 0

...

- - - - - - I I y

I' y

I' y ji

... - - - - - - -

lr Max: ; Min:

NOTES:

Max: ; Min: _I I

- Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 2x320kN

- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 580kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz wtthstand of insulator set complete wtth all fittings: 460kV

- Dry impulse withstand vo age 1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fittings: 1050kV

- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz BS 137-2): <100 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm - Adjustable range item 3 is of 100 to BOOmm; number of extension links

per branch could be from 0 to 3 according to line angle and crossarm shape. - a - Une Deviation Angle - All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 19/4


APPENDIX 19


12 2 Compression Dead End Clamp 11 2 Shackle 10 1 Yoke 9 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 8 1 Une End Arcing Ring 7 1 Corona Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 4 Ball Eye (Coupling 20mm) 3 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 Shackle 1 Shackle



45


----------

5 12

----------

----------

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical failing load of complete insulator set: 230kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 580kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with oil fitlings: 460kV


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 JJV - Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm

- Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossann shape. - All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer


SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 19/5


APPENDIX 19


13 2 Compression Dead End Clomp 12 2 Turnbuckle (150mm Adjustable Range) 11 2 Shackle 10 1 Yoke 9 1 Boll Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 8 1 Une End Arcing Ring 7 1 Corona Ring 6 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 5 1 Adjustable Earth End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Eye (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Clevis Tongue (if required) 2 1 Shackle 1 1 Shackle



1200-1800

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B -9 10 11 12 13

- - - fl

Il1ft IlIllft

,...., - -

- - - - - -

0

I Irr Ir I II r T

1-'

-\!

.,

- - -

Max: ; Min:

...

- - -

"...'.

Max: ; Min: I I

NOTES: - Minimum mechanical foiling load of complete insulator set: 230kN - Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz wahstond of insulator set complete with all filtings: 380-565kV - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete wah all fittings: 280-420kV

- Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all filtings: 68D-1025kV


- Length (L) of Clevis Tongue (if necessary) according to entry angle and crossarm shape. - All dimensions are in mm. - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.

SP-11148 MAY 2008 Page 19/6


APPENDIX 19


11 1 Counterweight 50kg 10 1 Shackle 9 1 Ball Eye (Coupling 20mm) 8 1 Earth End Arcing Ring 7 1 Silicone Rubber Insulator (B&S 20mm) 6 1 Corona Ring 5 1 Une End Arcing Ring 4 1 Socket Clevis (Coupling 20mm) 3 1 Yoke Plate 2 2 Shackle 1 2 Suspension Clamp


I

-

-o .,

IX)

- " " 0 0


('._----10 (

I I

9

8 cc

I

r- ':)")

"c' .""""'0

>O>..c

Cc>""O


- Minimum short circuit rating: 25 kA/1 sec - Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fillings: 580kV

0

--i -- - C1.l - Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings: 460kV 0

,..., "' x

"E

7 --:rtt;--

6

5 1 , I

4 I

11

3

2

t

c -:..;;;; 0

:s"


- Maximum RIV at 1000kHz (BS 137-2): <100 pV - Nominal creepage distance: 9800mm - Coupling type & size: B&S-20mm - All dimensions are in mm - Weight of complete set: to be specified by the manufacturer - Required string main dimensions: to be specified by the manufacturer.


Appendix H1

CONDUCTOR JOINTS & CLAMPS – TYPE & USES


Item Description Phase Conductors Shieldwires

AAAC ELM & YEW 7/3.26 ACS OPGW

1. Suspension Clamp Type Corona Free Trunnion Trunnion Armor Grip

2. Armor Rods Yes - Yes

3. Tension Joints

3.1. Dead End Type Compression Compression Helical

3.2. Jumper Terminal Type Bolted - -

3.3. Midspan Type Compression Compression -

3.4. Repair Sleeve Type Compression Compression Helical

3.5. Tee Connectors Type Compression - -

4. Non-tension Joints – Jumper Palm

Type

5. Shieldwire Bonds – End Fitting

Type

6. Minimum Failing Load for

Shieldwire Complete Set

30° - -

- Pin - φ16mm Bolt Pin - φ16mm Bolt

φ16mm-φ16mm Bolt

6.1. Suspension - 70 70

6.2. Tension - 125 125

SP-1114B Page H1-1 May 2008


Appendix H2

VIBRATION DAMPERS - TYPE & USES



Single AAAC ELM per Phase Single AAAC YEW per Phase

132kV 132kV 220kV

Phase

Conductor

Shieldwire

7/3.264 ACS

Phase

Conductor

Shieldwire

7/3.264 ACS

Phase

Conductor

Shieldwire

7/3.264 ACS

1. Basic Span [m] 300 350 390

2. Conductor Every Day Tension at 35°C [kN] 7.1 5.4 23.8 7.8 23.3 7.8

3. Armour rod fitted No No No

4. Vibration damper type Stockbridge Stockbridge Stockbridge

5. Weight [kg]

6. Fitting distance from clamp mouth

6.1. First damper for spans up to …m [mm]

6.2. Second damper for spans from …m to …m [mm]

7. Minimum axial slipping force [kN]

8. Minimum axial force on damper weight for

detachment

[kN]

9. Stranding of messenger cable 19 19 19

10. Minimum Tensile Strength of messenger

cable

[daN/mm²] 122 122 122

11. Material for messenger cable Stainless Steel Grade A Stainless Steel Grade A Stainless Steel Grade A

12. Material for clamps Aluminium Alloy Aluminium Alloy Aluminium Alloy

NOTE: Requirements for OPGW are given in Appendix O3, page O3/1



Appendix H3


SPACERS AND SPACER DAMPERS - TYPE & USES


Item Parameter 132kV Lines

Twin ELM Twin YEW

220kV Lines

Twin YEW

1. Spacer Dampers

300

350

390 1.1. Basic Span [m]

1.2. Every Day Tension at 35°C [kN] 7.1 23.8 23.3

1.3. Subconductor configuration Twin Twin Twin

1.4. Subconductor spacing [mm] 400 400 400

1.5. Tolerance in sagging of subconductors [mm] 50 50 50

1.6. Nominal system voltage [kV] 132 132 220

1.7. Short circuit rating [kA/1sec] 25 25 25

1.8. To be fitted adjacent to tension joint (dead Yes Yes Yes

end)

1.9. Installation criteria

(Manufacturer recommendations)

2. Spacers

2.1. To be fitted on jumpers, downleads and slack span only Yes Yes Yes

2.2. Maximum distance between spacers on jumpers [m] 2.5 2.5 3

(minimum 2)

2.3. Minimum spacers in downleads and slack spans [pcs.] 3 3 3

2.4. Subconductor spacing on jumper loops [mm] 200 200 250

2.5. Subconductor spacing on downleads and slack [mm] 400 400 450

spans



Appendix H4

TESTS ON VIBRATION DAMPERS

1. Type Tests

1.1. Conductor damage test

1.2. Clamp grip test

1.3. Slip test

1.4. Corona test

1.5. Vibration damper characteristics test

1.6. Damping effectiveness

1.7. Fatigue test

2. Sample Tests

2.1. Clamp grip

2.2. Slip test

2.3. Galvanised test



Appendix H5

TESTS ON SPACERS / SPACER DAMPERS

1. Type Tests

1.1. Conductor damage test

1.2. Clamp grip test

1.3. Visible corona test

1.4. Strength test (spacer damper only)

1.5. Movement test (spacer damper only)

1.6. Log decrement (spacer damper only)

1.7. Damping test (flexible element - spacer damper only)

1.8. Longitudinal test (spacer damper only)

1.9. Subconductor oscillation test (spacer damper only)

1.10. Aeolian vibration test (spacer damper only)

1.11. Elastomeric bushes resistance test (spacer damper only)

1.12. Jumper bonding spacer resistance test.

2. Sample Tests

2.1. Clamp grip strength test

2.2. Electrical resistance on the bushes test

2.3. Galvanising test



Appendix H6

TYPE AND SAMPLE TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR INSULATOR FITTINGS

CONDUCTOR AND SHIELDWIRE FITTINGS

Item Fitting Type of Test

Mechanical Resistance Heat Cycle Corona Bolt Torque Damage

1. Insulator set fittings T, S T

2. Shieldwire set fittings T, S

3. Insulator Protective fittings T, S T

4. Suspension Clamps T, S T T, S T,S

5. Shieldwire Suspension

Clamps

T, S T, S T, S

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Tee Connectors

- compression T, S T, S T T T, S

- bolted T, S T, S T T T, S

Tension Joints (dead-ends)

- compression T, S T, S T T

- bolted T, S T T T, S T, S

- wedge T, S T T T, S T, S

- helical T, S T T T, S

Tension Joints (midspan)

- compression T, S T, S T

Non-tension Joints

- disconnectable T, S T, S T

- non-disconnectable T, S T, S T

- jumper palms T, S T, S T, S

Repair sleeves

- compression T, S T, S

- helical T, S T, S

11. Line termination fittings T, S T, S

12. Armor rods T

13. Shieldwire bonding clamps T

14. Shieldwire bonds T, S

Symbols:

T = Type Tests

S = Sample Tests


Appendix S1

INSULATOR SETS TYPES & USES, ELECTRICAL & MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS (to be completed/confirmed by Tenderer/Contractor)

SP-1114B Page S1-1 May 2008

132 kV, Single ELM AAAC per Phase

Item Insulator Set Type Normal

Suspension

Heavy Suspension*

Normal Tension

Upright Light Duty Tension

Inverted Light Duty Tension

Jumper Suspension**

1. Reference drawing

2. Set configuration I II Single Single Single I 3. Number of long rod insulators

per set 1 2 1 1 1 1

4. Kind of connection to tower

crossarm Single Single Single Single Single Single

5. Minimum spacing between

parallel strings [mm] - 400 - - - -

6. Coupling type & size [mm] B&S-16A B&S-16A B&S-16A B&S-16A B&S-16A B&S-16A

7. Security clip type R R R R R R

8. Number of sub-conductors 1 1 1 1 1 1

9.

10.

Sub-conductor spacing - In line [mm] - - - - - - - In jumpers [mm] - - - - - - Sag Adjuster - Type - - Quadrant Plate - Turnbuckle - - Linear range [mm] - - 300 - 150 - - Increment [mm] - - 12 - - -

11. Maximum working load [kN] 10 12 24 9 9 1 12. Minimum mechanical failing load

of complete insulator set [kN] 80 2x80 80 80 80 80

13. Insulator protective devices type - Line end R i n g R i n g R i n g R i n g Ring Ri ng - Earth end Ri ng Rin g Rin g Rin g Adjustable R i n g Ring

14. Arcing distance between line end arcing device and earth end device [mm]

15. Mass of complete set with all fittings [kg]

16. Overall length of complete suspension set from bottom conductor to tower attachment point [mm]

17. Length from tension set jumper lug to tower attachment point [mm]

18. Lift of arcing device over line end

1150 1150 1150 1150 650÷1050 1150

- - -

- - -

shed unit [mm] 45 45 45 45 - 45

19. Insulator type & Silicone

Rubber Silicone Rubber Silicone Rubber Silicone Rubber Silicone Rubber

Silicone

Rubber drawing no

20. Nominal creepage distance [mm] 5800 5800 5800 5800 5800 5800

21. Dry 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings [kV]

22. Wet 1-minute 50Hz withstand of insulator set complete with all fittings [kV]

23. Dry impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) of insulator set complete with all fittings [kV]

24. Maximum RIV at 1000kHz

450 450 450 450 290÷440 450

400 400 400 400 270÷370 400

735 735 735 735 475÷720 735

(BS 137-2) [μV] < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50

(*) To be used for Wadi and Asphalted Road Crossings (**) To be provided with counterweights of 50kg


Appendix S1



132 kV, Twin ELM AAAC per Phase


Suspension

Heavy Suspension*

Normal Tension



Jumper Suspension**

1. Reference drawing 2. Set configuration I II Single Single Single I 3. Number of long rod insulators

per set 1 2 1 1 1 1





6. Coupling type & size [mm] B&S-16A B&S-16A B&S-20 B&S-16A B&S-16A B&S-16A

7. Security clip type R R R R R R 8. Number of sub-conductors 2 2 2 2 2 2

9.

10.

Sub-conductor spacing - In line [mm] 400 400 400 400 400 - - In jumpers [mm] - - - - - 200 Sag Adjuster - Type - - Quadrant Plate - Turnbuckle - - Linear range [mm] - - 300 - 150 - - Increment [mm] - - 12 - - -



13. Insulator protective devices type - Line end R i n g R i n g R i n g R i n g Ring Ring - Earth end Ri ng Rin g Rin g Rin g Adjustable R i n g Ri ng






1150 1150 1150 1150 650÷1050 1150

- - -

- - -

shed unit [mm] 45 45 45 45 - 45

19.

Insulator type & Silicone


Silicone Rubber

drawing no 20. Nominal creepage distance [mm] 5800 5800 5800 5800 5800 5800





450 450 450 450 290÷440 450

400 400 400 400 270÷370 400

735 735 735 735 475÷720 735

(BS 137-2) [μV] < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50




Appendix S1


132 kV, Single YEW AAAC per Phase


Suspension

Heavy Suspension*

Normal Tension



Jumper Suspension**


per set 1 2 1 1 1 1







9.

10.




13. Insulator protective devices type - Line end R i n g R i n g R i n g R i n g Ring Ring - Earth end R i ng R i ng R i ng R i ng Adjustable R i n g Ring






1150 1150 1150 1150 650÷1050 1150

- - -

- - -

shed unit [mm] 45 45 45 45 - 45

19.



Silicone Rubber






450 450 450 450 290÷440 450

400 400 400 400 270÷370 400

735 735 735 735 475÷720 735

(BS 137-2) [μV] < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50




Appendix S1


132 kV, Twin YEW AAAC per Phase


Suspension

Heavy Suspension*

Normal Tension



Jumper Suspension**

1. Reference drawing 2. Set configuration I II Double Single Single I 3. Number of long rod insulators

per set 1 2 2 1 1 1


crossarm Single Single Double Single Single Single


parallel strings [mm] - 400 400 - - -

6. Coupling type & size [mm] B&S-20 B&S-20 B&S-20 B&S-20 B&S-20 B&S-20


9.

10.

Sub-conductor spacing - In line [mm] 400 400 400 400 400 - - In jumpers [mm] - - - - - 200 Sag Adjuster - Type - - Quadrant Plates - Turnbuckle - - Linear range [mm] - - 300 - 150 - - Increment [mm] - - 12 - - -


of complete insulator set [kN] 230 2x230 2x320 230 230 230

13. Insulator protective devices type - Line end R i n g R i n g R i n g R i n g Ring Ring - Earth end Ri ng Rin g Rin g Rin g Adjustable R i n g Ring






1150 1150 1150 1150 650÷1050 1150

- - -

- - -

shed unit [mm] 45 45 45 45 - 45

19.



Silicone Rubber






450 450 450 450 290÷440 450

400 400 400 400 270÷370 400

735 735 735 735 475÷720 735

(BS 137-2) [μV] < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50




Appendix S1


220 kV, Single YEW AAAC per Phase


Suspension

Heavy Suspension*

Normal Tension



Jumper Suspension**


per set 1 2 1 1 1 1







9.

10.




13. Insulator protective devices type - Line end R i n g R i n g s R i n g R i n g R i n g R i n g - Earth end R i n g R i n g s R i n g R i n g Adjustable R i n g Ri ng






1900 1900 1900 1900 1200÷1800 1900

- - -

- - -

shed unit [mm] 45 45 45 45 - 45

19.



Silicone Rubber






580 580 580 580 380÷565 580

460 460 460 460 280÷420 460

1050 1050 1050 1050 680÷1025 1050

(BS 137-2) [μV] < 100 < 100 < 100 < 100 < 100 < 100




Appendix S1


220 kV, Twin YEW AAAC per Phase


Suspension

Heavy Suspension*

Normal Tension



Jumper Suspension**

1. Reference drawing

2. Set configuration I II Double Single Single I 3. Number of long rod insulators

per set 1 2 2 1 1 1


crossarm Single Single Double Single Single Single


parallel strings [mm] - 450 450 - - -

6. Coupling type & size [mm] B&S-20 B&S-20 B&S-20 B&S-20 B&S-20 B&S-20

7. Security clip type R R R R R R

8. Number of sub-conductors 2 2 2 2 2 2

9.

10.

Sub-conductor spacing - In line [mm] 450 450 450 450 450 - - In jumpers [mm] - - - - - 250

Sag Adjuster - Type - - Quadrant Plates - Turnbuckle - - Linear range [mm] - - 300 - 150 - - Increment [mm] - - 12 - - -


of complete insulator set [kN] 230 2x230 2x320 230 230 230

13. Insulator protective devices type - Line end R i n g R i n g s R i n g s R i n g R i n g R i n g - Earth end R i ng R i ngs R i ngs R i n g Adjustable R i ng Ri ng






1900 1900 1900 1900 1200÷1800 1900

- - -

- - -

shed unit [mm] 45 45 45 45 - 45

19.



Silicone Rubber






580 580 580 580 380÷565 580

460 460 460 460 280÷420 460

1050 1050 1050 1050 680÷1025 1050

(BS 137-2) [μV] < 100 < 100 < 100 < 100 < 100 < 100



APPENDIX W1

Road Crossing Arrangement for 132kV Lines on Wooden Poles, Single & Twin ELM MAC per Phase 1. Crossing Towers - Single Circuit, Horizontal Conductor Arrangement

Crossing Span less than 200m (using ADSS) Structures adjacent to Crossing Span - Wooden Poles

Tower Type 1RCH/E1 (Single ELM AAAC per phase) Tower Type 1RCH/E2 (Twin ELM AAAC per phase)

Tower Type 1RCH/E1 (Single ELM AAAC per phase Tower Type 1RCH/E2 (Twin ELM AAAC per phase)

WOODEN POLE TERMINAL STRUCTURE Dwg. No. SID 4 1434 002 (Sing ELM with FOC) Dwg. No. SID 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM w h FOC)

EN POLE TERMINAL STRUCTURE Dwg. No. SID 4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) Dwg. No. SID 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM w FOC)

NOTES: 1. When arranging the crossing car shall be taken to locate the structures in the safest location available. 2. Where on authority exercising jurisdiction over structure location close to the rood has issued a permit for, or otherwise approved, specific location for supporting structure, that permit or approval shall govern. 3. Crossing structures located within 30m from rood shoulder shall be protected according to page 10 of this Appendix. 4. Wooden Pole Terminal Structure Anrongement - according to PDO Specification SP1114A - Standard Drawings No. STD4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) and STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

5. Lattice Steel Crossing Towers - use 1RCH/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1RCH/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

6. Minimum crossing angle between 132kV line and roods (a): 60" for Highway, 45" for Aspholted Roads and 30" for Secondary Roods; for convenience only the Highway crossing is shown. 7. For clarity only one conductor per phase is shown on the drawing.

SP-11148 Page W1/1 MAY 2008


APPENDIX W1

Road Crossing Arrangement for 132kV Lines on Wooden Poles, Single & Twin ELM MAC per Phase 2. Crossing Towers - Single Circuit, Isosceles Triangle Conductor Arrangement


/

.... JOm

IMX. 100m ""' 200m MAX. 100m SLACK SPM FULL TENSION SPNi SLACK SPAN

Tower Type 1SD9/E1 (Single ELM IN£ per phose)

Tower Type 1SD9/E2 (Twin ELM NN:. par phase)

Tower Type 1SD9/E1 (Single ELM INC per phoee)

Tower Type 1SD9/E2 (Twin WI MN:. per phase)

WOODEN POL£ liRMINAI. STRUClURE Dwg. No. STD 4 14J4 002 (Single WI with FOC) Dwg. No. SID 4 1455 002 (Twin WI with FOC)

WOODEN POLE TERMINAL STRUCTURE Dwg. No. SID 4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC)

Dwg. No. SID 4 1-455 002 (Twin WI with FOC)

NOTES: 1. When arranging the crossing care shall be taken to locate the structures in the safest location available. 2. Where on authority exercising jurisdiction over structure location close to the rood has issued a permit for, or otherwise approved, specific location for supporting structure, that permit or approval shall govern. 3. Crossing structures located within 30m from rood shoulder shall be protected according to page 10 of this Appendix. 4. Wooden Pole Terminal Structure Arrangement - according to PDO Specification SP1114A - Standard Drawings No. STD4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) and STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

5. Lattice Steel Crossing Towers - use 1SD9/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1SD9/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

6. Minimum crossing angle between 132kV line and roods (a): 60" for Highway, 45" for Aspholted Roods and 30" for Secondary Roods; for convenience only the Highway crossing is shown. 7. For clarity only one conductor per phase is shown on the drawing.

SP-11148 Page W1/2 MAY 2008


APPENDIX W1

Road Crossing Arrangement for 132kV Lines on Wooden Poles, Single & Twin ELM MAC per Phase 3. Crossing Towers - Double Circuit


Tower Type 1DD9/E1 (Single B..M INC per ph111e) Tower Twa 1DD9/E2 (Twln El..M ltNC par phose)

Tower Type 1009/E1 (Single El.ll ANr. per phase)

Tower Type 1009/£2 (Twin El..M INC per pha•)

WOODEN POLE TERt.INAI.. STRI.ICTlm Dwg. No. STD 4 1434 002 (SIII!,W ELM with FOC) DwQ. No. SID 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FDC)

NOTES: 1. When arranging the crossing care shall be taken to locate the structures in the safest location available. 2. Where on authority exercising jurisdiction over structure location close to the rood has issued a permit for, or otherwise approved, specific location for supporting structure, that permit or approval shall govern. 3. Crossing structures located within 30m from rood shoulder shall be protected according to page 10 of this Appendix. 4. Wooden Pole Terminal Structure Anrongement - according to PDQ Specification SP1114A - Standard Drawings No. STD4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) and STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

5. Lattice Steel Crossing Towers - use 1DD9/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1DD9/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

6. Minimum crossing angle between 132kV line and roods (a): 60' for Highway, 45' for Aspholted Roads and 30' for Secondary Roods; for convenience only the Highway crossing is shown. 7. For clarity only one conductor per phase is shown on the drawing.

SP-11148 Poge Wl/3 MAY 2008

- •I


APPENDIX W2


Crossing Span less than 200m (using ADSS) Structures adjacent to Crossing Span - Steel Towers

· 1"1-L NAT MUll 't

I il I! I

i"lI.

•u•

HIGHWAY

/

'"'"" '"'"" IN. 10111n IMX. 11111111 IIIIIIL Zlllnl

SlACK SPill RlL 1ENSION SIWil FilL 1ENSIOM SIWI

IIIIIL 2IDII I6W. 100m

FilL 1EN5ION SIWil SACIC SPM

y_. T)pe 1SD8/E1 (!qla WI INC pr Ill-) T_.T)pe lm,IEI O.IIINC pr ,._)

r- TWIMi ISlll/£2 (Twin ELM INC per ) y_. T)pe 1Sf2/E2 (Twin ElM INC per

r- fyp1 ISI2/E1 (Shgll E1..11 INC pr Ill-) y_. Tp ISDI/E1 (Sn;ll El..ll INC pr .....,

y_. 1yPe 151'2/EZ (l'llln ELM INC I*' pe..) T_.l)rpe 1SD8/E2 (l'llln EUIN/C per phoet)

NOTES: 1. When arranging the crossing core shall be taken to locate the structures in the safest location available. 2. Where an authority exercising jurisdiction over structure location close to the road has issued a permit for, or otherwise approved, specific location for supporting structure, that permit or approval shall govern. 3. Crossing structures located within 30m from rood shoulder shell be protected according to page 10 of this Appendix.

4. Wooden Pole Terminal Structure Anrongement - according to PDO Specification SP1114A - Standard Drawings No. STD4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) end STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

5. Lattice Steel Crossing Towers - use 1ST2/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1ST2/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

6. Connections to Wooden Pole Terminal Structures - use 1SD9/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1SD9/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification. 7. Minimum crossing engle between 132kV line and roads (a): 60" for Highway, 45" for Asphalted Roads and 30" for Secondary Roads; for convenience only the Highway crossing is shown. 8. For clarity only one conductor per phase is shown on the drawing.

SP-11148 Page W1/4 MAY 2008

•

..... cr• '* ,._, cr• '* ,._,


APPENDIX W1


Crossing Span less than 200m (using ADSS) Structures adjacent to Crossing Span - Steel Towers

L M0 liT MUll

d

HlrMWA:I

,

MNI.IIIIIIn 111111.2111111 IMILIIIInl IMII. lDinl - llllm SlACK SPAN FW. 1ENSIDN SPNI RlL 1ENSilN SPAN

T_. T)pe IDIII/E1 (S9I ELM ,_ pr ...., T_. T)pe IDD/EI (Sklgll D.ll INC pr Ill-) r_.- T,p. IID/EZ (r... ELM NIC pll' ,._) r_.- r,_ IIJD,/El (rwln ElM INe 1111" ,._)

IW. 1ENSIDN SPNI !1.101 SIWI ,._ T)pl 11112/E1 (Shgll D.IIMIC pr Ill-) T_. Tp llll8/E1 (Shgll D.ll INC pr Ill-)

r_.r,. 1012/EZ ELM N C r...TJpltoot/EZ ELM N C

'MlOOEN PCl.E 'IEIIIIW. SIRUCRIIES

Illig. Ito. SID 4 1434 CIIZ (s;n;. ElM 111111 RIC) 11wt- MII.SID41o4.511 002 ('1'lh EIJI .... RIC)

NOTES: 1. When arranging the crossing core shall be taken to locate the structures in the safest location available. 2. Where an authority exercising jurisdiction over structure location close to the road has issued a permit for, or otherwise approved, specific location for supporting structure, that permit or approval shall govern. 3. Crossing structures located within 30m from rood shoulder shell be protected according to page 10 of this Appendix. 4. Wooden Pole Terminal Structure Arrangement - according to PDQ Specification SP1114A - Standard Drawings No. STD4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) end STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

5. Lattice Steel Crossing Towers - use 1DT2/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1DT2/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

6. Connections to Wooden Pole Terminal Structures - use 1DD9/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1DD9/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

7. Minimum crossing engle between 132kV line and roods (a): 60" for Highway, 45' for Aspholted Roods and 30' for Secondary Roads; for convenience only the Highway crossing is shown. 8. For clarity only one conductor per phase is shown on the drawing.

SP-11148

Poge Wl/5 MAY 2008


APPENDIX W2


Crossing Span over 200m (using OPGW) Structures adjacent to Crossing Span - Wooden Poles

PHASE CONDUCTORS

HIGHWAY

""'S'"IJ"<K" SPAN

Tower Type 1SD9/E1 (Single ELM INt. per ph1111) Tower Type ISD9/E2 (Twin ELM NH:. per phase)

FULl "TE"N"SI"O"N"S' P SIJ<K""S'P'A"N""

Tower Type 1SD9/E1 Single ELM INC per phaH) Tower Type ISD9/E2 (Twin ELM NH:. per phase)

WOODEN POLE TERt.ltw.. STRUCTlJRE

DMJ. No. STD 4- 1434 002 Sir9e ELM with FOC) Dwg. No. STD 4 1455 002 (Twin B.M with FOC)

V.OOOEN POLE TERMINAL STRUCTURE Dwg. No. SID 4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) Dwg. No. STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

NOTES: 1. When arranging the crossing care shall be taken to locate the structures in the safest location available. 2. Where on authority exercising jurisdiction over structure location close to the rood has issued a permit for, or otherwise approved, specific location for supporting structure, that permit or approval shall govern. 3. Crossing structures located within 30m from rood shoulder shall be protected according to page 10 of this Appendix. 4. Wooden Pole Terminal Structure Anrongement - according to PDO Specification SP1114A - Standard Drawings No. STD4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) and STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

5. Lattice Steel Crossing Towers - use 1SD9/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1SD9/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

6. Minimum crossing angle between 132kV line and roods (a): 60" for Highway, 45" for Aspholted Roads and 30" for Secondary Roods; for convenience only the Highway crossing is shown. 7. For clarity only one conductor per phase is shown on the drawing.

SP-11148 Page W1/6 MAY 2008


APPENDIX W1


Crossing Span over 200m (using OPGW) Structures adjacent to Crossing Span - Wooden Poles

Tower Type 1009/EI (Single ELM INC per phase) Tower Type 1DD9/E2 (Twin ELM MN; per ph01e)

Tower Type 1DD9/E1 (Single ELM INC per phCIIII) Tower Type 1009/E2 (Twin ELM INC per phase)

WOODEN POLE TERMINH. SJR ES Dwg. No. SID 4 1434 002 (Single El..t.l with FOC) Dwg. No. SID 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

NOTES: 1. When arranging the crossing care shall be taken to locate the structures in the safest location available. 2. Where on authority exercising jurisdiction over structure location close to the rood has issued a permit for, or otherwise approved, specific location for supporting structure, that permit or approval shall govern. 3. Crossing structures located within 30m from rood shoulder shall be protected according to page 10 of this Appendix. 4. Wooden Pole Terminal Structure Anrongement - according to PDQ Specification SP1114A - Standard Drawings No. STD4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) and STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

5. Lattice Steel Crossing Towers - use 1DD9/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1DD9/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

6. Minimum crossing angle between 132kV line and roods (a): 60' for Highway, 45' for Aspholted Roads and 30' for Secondary Roods; for convenience only the Highway crossing is shown. 7. For clarity only one conductor per phase is shown on the drawing.

SP-11148 Poge W1/7 MAY 2008


APPENDIX W2

Road Crossing Arrangement for 132kV Lines on Wooden Poles, Single & Twin ELM MAC per Phase

8. For clarity only one conductor

SP-11148

per phase is shown on the drawing.

MAY 2008 Page W1/8

il. •I ''"'"'

8. Crossing Towers - Single Circuit, Isosceles Triangle Conductor Arrangement

Crossing Span over 200m (using OPGW) Structures adjacent to Crossing Span - Steel Towers

• I 8 I!

I "! HIGHWAY -_ ..

liN. 100m UP 10 IMliiUI SIWI CMR 200m

SLJa( SPAN Fill 1ENSilN SIWI Rll 1ENSIDN SIWI

y_. T)'lle 19lii/E1 WI INC p1r Ill-) r- 'JWie ISI'Jft1 (Silgllt WI INC p11" !11-) y_. T)pe 1SD9/E2 ('l1in ELM Nit. per ptae) T_.l)'pt 1Sl2/E2 (lWin EU1 N1C per )

/

Ll' 10 IMIIIUI SIWI IWC. lOOm

Fill TENSION !I'M SLJa( SIWII

y_. T)pe 1SI2/EI ElM INC p11' !11-) y_. TJPII l!llii/EI ElM INC pll' Ill-) y_. T)1ll 1SJ2ft2 (l'lrn EU1 N1C per .,._) y_. Type 1SDI/E2 (Twin WI INC per plae)

NOTES: 1. When arranging the crossing c re shall be taken to locate the structures in the safest location available. 2. Where an authority exercising jurisdiction over structure location close to the road has issued a permit for, or otherwise approved, specific location for supporting structure, that permit or approval shall govern. 3. Crossing structures located within 30m from rood shoulder shell be protected according to page 10 of this Appendix.

4. Wooden Pole Terminal Structure Anrongement - according to PDO Specification SP1114A - Standard Drawings No. STD4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) end STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

5. Lattice Steel Crossing Towers - use 1ST2/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1ST2/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

6. Connections to Wooden Pole Terminal Structures - use 1SD9/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1SD9/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification. 7. Minimum crossing engle between 132kV line and roads (a): 60" for Highway, 45" for Asphalted Roads and 30" for Secondary Roads; for convenience only the Highway crossing is shown.

8. For clarity only one conductor

SP-11148

per phase is shown on the drawing.

MAY 2008 Page W1/9


APPENDIX W1

Road Crossing Arrangement for 132kV Lines on Wooden Poles, Single & Twin ELM MAC per Phase

•

d _j

9. Crossing Towers - Double Circuit

Crossing Span over 200m (using OPGW) Structures adjacent to Crossing Span - Steel Towers

""""""""""

· '

, IMX.IIIIIIn IJ'liiiMIMII!Plllll CMRIIIIrn

SACK !JIM RIJ. 1ENSKIN SPM FW. TENSIIN !JIM

r_.- IDD8/E1 (a9l n.11 & pr I'l-l r- rw- 11m/E1 lSqll n.11 ,.,.. p -.J T-l)pe 11118/E2 (l'ftl EIJI Nil! pr ....-) y_. 1P 11112/E2 (l'ftl EIJI INC pr pm.)

II' 1D IMIIIII !INN 111111. llllm

RIL TEN5Itll !JIM SIIOI SPill ,._ TJIIIIIJIJ/EI (a.gll EIJI IN& pr Ill-) ,._ TJIIIIID/E1 (a.;. ElM INt. pr

T_.'Jp IIIIJ,In (l'ftl EIJI 1111.: pr .-.> ,._ 1)111 IIQIE2 (1'ltl EIJIIIIC pll'

'IIOOIIEN POL£ 1ERYM. SIRIJCIUIIES

Illig. ND. SID 4 14.14. 0112 (!t9a EIJI .... FOC) 0.,. ND.SID4141i6002(T... EIJiwlhFOC)

NOTES: 1. When arranging the crossing core shall be taken to locate the structures in the safest location available. 2. Where an authority exercising jurisdiction over structure location close to the road has issued a permit for, or otherwise approved, specific location for supporting structure, that permit or approval shall govern. 3. Crossing structures located within 30m from rood shoulder shell be protected according to page 10 of this Appendix. 4. Wooden Pole Tenminal Structure Arrangement - according to PDQ Specification SP1114A - Standard Drawings No. STD4 1434 002 (Single ELM with FOC) end STD 4 1455 002 (Twin ELM with FOC)

5. Lattice Steel Crossing Towers - use 1DT2/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1DT2/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

6. Connections to Wooden Pole Terminal Structures - use 1DD9/E1 (single ELM MAC line) or 1DD9/E2 (twin ELM MAC line) designed according to present Specification.

7. Minimum crossing engle between 132kV line and roods (a): 60" for Highway, 45' for Aspholted Roods and 30' for Secondary Roads; for convenience only the Highway crossing is shown.


APPENDIX W1 Road Crossing Arrangement for 132kV Lines on Wooden Poles, Single & Twin ELM MAC per Phase

10. Tower Crash Protection

- ··-··-· I S30m FROM ROAD SHOULDER

0 I

I

MIN. 14m FOR MAIN ROADS, I MIN. 5.5m FOR MINOR ROAOS, TRACKS,

ROW, TOP OF WIND ROW, FLOW LINES I

I

I

I I

/ _I. L

REINFORCED POST

NOTE: TOWER CRASH PROTECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL TOWERS AT ROAD CROSSING, ROW, PIPELINES, FLOW LINES, TRACKS AND MINOR ROADS.

SP-11148 Poge Wl/10 MAY 2008

[Type text]

[Type text]


APPENDIX W1 Road Crossing Arrangement for 132kV Lines on Wooden Poles, Single & Twin ELM MAC per Phase

11. Clearance to Roads )(\1.\UI.I i <AAiURt.

t.MP POSITION OF CONOUCiOR Ai I.IA

SURFACE OF ROAD INCLUDING ROAD SHOULDER ETC.

SP-11148 Page W1/11 MAY 2008

specification

Technology